BMW 550iGran Turismo 5 Series 2011 Owner's Manual PDF
en
Summary of Content for BMW 550iGran Turismo 5 Series 2011 Owner's Manual PDF
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
The Ultimate Driving Machine
Contents A-Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
535i 550i
535i xDrive 550i xDrive
Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English II/11, 03 11 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 286.
Using this Owner's Manual 6 Notes
At a glance 12 Cockpit 19 iDrive 25 Voice activation system 27 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls 32 Opening and closing 49 Adjusting 62 Transporting children safely 66 Driving 76 Displays 85 Lamps 89 Safety 99 Driving stability control systems 106 Driving comfort 127 Climate control 133 Interior equipment 139 Storage compartments
Driving tips 146 Things to remember when driving
Navigation 154 Navigation
Entertainment 172 Tone 174 Radio 181 CD/multimedia 201 Rear entertainment
Communication 210 Telephone 221 Office 230 Contacts 232 BMW ConnectedDrive
Mobility 240 Refueling 242 Fuel 243 Wheels and tires 251 Engine compartment 253 Engine oil 256 Maintenance 258 Replacing components 264 Breakdown assistance 269 Care
Reference 274 Technical data 277 Short commands of the voice activation
system 286 Everything from A to Z
Seite 5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Notes Using this Owner's Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Additional sources of information Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion. * Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional accessories, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing. "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se lect individual functions. ... Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac tivation system. ... Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor mation on a particular part or assembly.
Your individual vehicle You have decided in favor of a vehicle with indi vidualized equipment and features. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equipment available for a specific model. As a result, the manual may contain accessories and equipment that you may not have specified for your own vehicle. All options and special equipment are marked with an asterisk *. For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple mentary Owner's Manuals. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illustra tions.
Status of the Owner's Manual The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol icy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Seite 6
6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
No te
s
For your own safety Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, re quires suitable maintenance and repair meth ods. Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac cessories approved by BMW. When you pur chase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane ously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from de fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from in stallation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod ucts approved by BMW, together with profes sional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers. Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or trans ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie- talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re placement, or repair of the emission control de vices and systems may be performed by any au tomotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re productive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op erated under those conditions. If you wish to op
Seite 7
7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
erate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limita tions or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.
Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about mo tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehi cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 8
8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
No te
s
Seite 9
9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Cockpit All around the steering wheel
1 Seating comfort functions* Seat, mirror, steering wheel mem ory*58
Active seat*52
2 Roller sunblinds*46 3 Safety switch for the rear windows and roller
sunblinds*46 4 Power windows45 5 Exterior mirror operation59 6 Driver assistance systems*
Active Blind Spot Detec tion*96
Collision warning*112
Lane departure warning*95
Night Vision with pedestrian de tection*122
Head-up Display*125
7 Lamps Front fog lamps88
Parking lamps85
Low beams85
Automatic headlamp con trol*86 Daytime running lights*86 Adaptive light control*86 High-beam Assistant*87 Instrument lighting88
Seite 12
12 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Co ck
pi t
8 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal71
High beams, head lamp flasher71
High-beam Assistant*87
Roadside parking lamps86
Computer78
9 Steering wheel buttons, left Store speed114,107
Resume speed115,108
Cruise control on/off, inter rupt114,106
Increase distance*108
Decrease distance*108
10 Instrument cluster14 11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation*25
Telephone*210
12 Steering column stalk, right Windshield wipers71
Rain sensor*72
Clean the windshields and head lamps*71
13 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off66
14 Horn 15 Steering wheel heating*61
16 Adjust the steering wheel61
17 Open the tailgate*40
18 Unlocking the hood
Seite 13
13 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge76 2 Speedometer 3 Indicator/warning lamps14 4 Tachometer77 5 Engine oil temperature77
6 External temperature77 7 Electronic displays16 8 Miles, trip miles78 9 Clock81 10 Reset miles78
Indicator/warning lamps Instrument cluster
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning when the engine is started or the ig nition is switched on, and light up briefly in the process.
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal
Parking brake
Parking brake in Canadian models
Automatic Hold*
Front fog lamps*
Seite 14
14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Co ck
pi t
Symbol Function or system
High beams
High-beam Assistant*
Parking lamps, headlamp control
Active Cruise Control*
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control*
Cruise control*
Lane departure warning*
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Tire Pressure Monitor*
Safety belts
Airbag system
Symbol Function or system
Steering system
Emissions
Brake system
Brake system in Canadian models
Antilock Brake System ABS
Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana dian models
Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages Additional information on the Control Display, e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re quired action, can be called up via Check Con trol, refer to page 83. The text of urgent messages is displayed auto matically.
Seite 15
15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Instrument cluster, electronic displays
1 Symbols and messages, e.g., warnings14 2 Range76 3 Computer*78 4 Navigation display*154
Service display82
5 Selection list, forinstance radio78 6 Transmission displays75
Seite 16
16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Co ck
pi t
All around the center console
1 Headliner18 2 Control Display19 3 Glove compartment139 4 Air vent130 5 Hazard warning system264
Central locking system38
6 Radio174 CD/Multimedia181
7 Automatic climate control127 8 Controller with buttons19 9 Parking brake67
Auto Hold69
10 PDC Park Distance Con trol*115 Top View*117 Backup camera*119 Side View*121
11 Dynamic Driving Control103
DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol103
12 Transmission selector lever
Seite 17
17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
All around the headliner
1 Emergency Request*264
2 Panoramic glass sunroof*47
3 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag*91
4 Reading lamps*88
5 Interior lamps88
Seite 18
18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Co ck
pi t
iDrive The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu pants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traf fic and road conditions allow this.
Controls at a glance Controls
1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Notes To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions. Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.
Switching off
1. Press the button. 2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on Press the controller again to switch the screen back on.
Controller Select menu items and create settings. 1. Turn.
2. Press.
Seite 19
19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
CD Opens the CD/Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation map view.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".
Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previous panel is displayed. The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed.
Move the controller to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previous display.
Seite 20
20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
iD riv
e
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed. Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis played.
Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged. Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g., for "Radio". If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings 1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated. The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".
Seite 21
21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.
Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the sta tus field at the top right: Time. Current entertainment source. Sound output, on/off. Wireless network reception strength. Telephone status. Traffic bulletin reception*.
Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
Traffic bulletins* are switched on.
HD Radio* is switched on.
Satellite radio* is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call*.
Missed call*.
Wireless network reception strength* Symbol flashes: searching for network.
Wireless network is not available*.
Bluetooth* is switched on.
Roaming* is active.
Text message* was received.
Check the SIM card*.
SIM card* is blocked.
SIM card* is missing.
Enter the PIN*.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD* player.
Music collection*.
Gracenote database*.
AUX-IN port.
Rear AUX-IN port on the left*.
Rear AUX-IN port on the right*.
Seite 22
22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
iD riv
e
Symbol Meaning
USB audio interface*.
Mobile phone audio interface*.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions* are switched off.
Request of the current vehicle posi tion*.
Split screen* General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.
Running a function Press the button. The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.
Seite 23
23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
To display short information: touch the but ton.
To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period.
Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds. 2. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num
bers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed. 3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter or number.
Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering letters and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering upper and lower case letters:
Symbol Function
Move the controller up: switch from upper to lower case letters.
Move the controller up: switch from lower to upper case letters.
Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. Only those letters are offered during the en
try for which data is available. Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language avail able on the Control Display.
Seite 24
24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
iD riv
e
Voice activation system* The concept The voice activation system can be used to
operate functions by means of spoken com mands.
Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The system prompts you to make your entries.
Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us ing the voice activation system.
The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.
... Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation sys tem.
Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identified. Set the language, refer to page 82.
Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi cates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, continue operating the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation system Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.
Possible commands Having possible commands read aloud The commands available in each case depend on the menu item selected on the Control Dis play. To have the available commands read out loud: Voice commands For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud.
Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: Help Additional commands for the help dialog: Help with examples: information about the
current operating options and the most im portant commands for them are announced.
Help with voice activation: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.
Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, irrespec tive of which menu item is currently selected, e.g., Vehicle status. List of short commands of the voice activation system, refer to page 277.
Seite 25
25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Example: playing back a CD 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. C D and multimedia The medium last played is played back.
4. Press the button on the steering wheel.
5. C D track ... e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an nouncements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form. On the Control Display:
1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set. The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel ephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to page 264, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.
Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.
When selecting a radio station, use the com mon pronunciation of the station name.
Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun roof* closed to prevent noise interference.
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Seite 26
26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Vo ic
e ac
tiv at
io n
sy st
em
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The integrated Owner's Manual can be dis played on the Control Display. The equipment and functions that are in the vehicle are descri bed therein.
Components of the integrated Owner's Manual The integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of infor mation or access possibilities.
Quick Reference Guide Located in the Quick Reference is important in formation for the operation of the vehicle, the operation of basic vehicle functions or for what to do in the event of a flat tire. This information can also be displayed during driving.
Search by pictures Information and descriptions based on illustra tions can be searched via search by pictures. This is helpful, for example, if the description of an outfitting package that cannot be named is needed.
Owner's Manual Information and descriptions can be searched by direct entry of a search term via the index.
Select components
1. Press the button. 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info". 3. Press the controller. 4. Selecting desired range:
"Quick reference" "Search by pictures"
"Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual Page by page with link access Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed.
Page by page without link access Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to leaf from page to page.
Leaf back.
Leaf forward.
Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function The relevant information can be opened directly.
Opening during operation via iDrive To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu:
Seite 27
27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
1. Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays:
1. Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to the function displayed last.
5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons General information The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly.
Storing 1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.
Executing Press the button. The Owner's Manual is displayed im
mediately.
Seite 28
28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
In te
gr at
ed O
wn er
's M
an ua
l in th
e ve
hi cl
e
Seite 29
29 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Opening and closing Remote control/key Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening the small tailgate 4 Panic mode*, headlamp courtesy delay fea
ture, opening the large tailgate*
General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls with keys. Every remote control contains a replaceable battery. The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal Profile, refer to page 33. In addition, information about service require ments is stored in the remote control, Service data in the remote control, refer to page 256.
Integrated key
Press the button on the back of the remote con trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2. The integrated key fits the following locks: Driver's door. Storage compartment in the front center
armrest. The storage compartment contains a switch for separately securing the tailgate, refer to page 42.
Replacing the battery
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart
ment; see arrow 2. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards. 5. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen ter or to your service center.
Seite 32
32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Op en
in g
an d
cl os
in g
New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center.
Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.
Emergency detection of remote control It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: Interference of radio transmission to remote
control by external sources. Discharged battery in the remote control. A Check Control message is displayed if an at tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.
Starting the engine in case of emergency detection of remote control
If a corresponding Check Control message ap pears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 sec onds while pressing the brake.
Personal Profile The concept
Personal Profile concept You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the profile that was last detected and called up with the re mote control is used.
Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three Per sonal Profiles and one guest profile.
Transmitting the settings Your personal settings can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro file function. For more information, contact your service center. Transmission takes place via: The USB interface*, refer to page 139, in
the glove compartment onto a USB device.
Profile management
Opening the profiles A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control currently in use.
1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile. The profile that is opened is assigned to the re mote control currently in use.
Renaming profiles 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
Seite 33
33 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
3. Open "Options". 4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values.
1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile.
1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Import profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 139: "USB device"
Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported.
This can be useful for storing and opening per sonal settings, for instance if settings are acci dentally changed or deleted.
1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" 4. USB interface, refer to page 139: "USB
device"
Using the guest profile The guest profile can be used to make individual settings without affecting the three Personal Profiles. This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile.
1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. The current profile is selected. 4. Open "Guest". 5. Create the settings. Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile.
1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. More information on the settings can be found under: Active Cruise Control: collision warning, re
fer to page 112. Exterior mirror position, refer to page 59. CD/Multimedia, refer to page 181: audio
source listened to last.
Seite 34
34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Op en
in g
an d
cl os
in g
Dynamic Driving Control: sport program, re fer to page 104.
Driver's seat position, refer to page 37: au tomatic retrieval after unlocking.
Programmable memory buttons, refer to page 23: assignment.
Head-up Display, refer to page 125: selec tion, brightness and position of the display.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer to page 85: time setting.
Tone, refer to page 172: tone settings. Automatic climate control, refer to
page 127: settings. Steering wheel position, refer to page 61 Navigation, refer to page 154: map views,
route criteria, voice output on/off. Night Vision with pedestrian detection, refer
to page 122: selection of functions and type of display.
Daytime running lights*, refer to page 86: current setting.
Park Distance Control PDC, refer to page 173: adjusting the signal tone volume.
Radio, refer to page 174: stored stations, station listened to last, special settings.
Backup camera, refer to page 119: selec tion of functions and type of display.
Side View, refer to page 121: selection of the display type.
Language on the Control Display, refer to page 82.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 95: last setting, on/off.
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 96: last setting, on/off.
Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 71.
Locking the vehicle, refer to page 39: after a brief period or after starting to drive.
Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed. The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks on the following: Doors. Tailgate. Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside Via the remote control. Via the driver's door lock*. Via the door handles*. Via the button on the tailgate*. The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote control: Anti-theft protection is switched on/off.
Doors cannot be unlocked using the lock buttons or the door opener.
The welcome lamps, interior lamps and courtesy lamps* are switched on and off.
The alarm system*, refer to page 44, is armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically.
Seite 35
35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.
Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control
General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.
Unlocking Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function: "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un locks the entire vehicle.
"All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Convenient opening The remote control can be used to simultane ously open the windows and the glass sunroof*.
Press and hold the button on the re mote control.
The windows and the glass sunroof* open. Releasing the button stops the motion.
Locking Press the button on the remote control.
Do not lock from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.
Switching on the interior lamps, courtesy lamps*, and welcome lamps
Press the button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode* You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote control.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Opening the tailgate Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.
The small tailgate opens slightly. The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available be fore opening.
Seite 36
36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Op en
in g
an d
cl os
in g
With automatic trunk lid operation*: Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release.
The large tailgate opens automatically.
Note the opening height of the large tail gate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result.
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. In some vehicle equipment variants, the tailgate can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first. To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do not place the remote control into the cargo area. The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed.
Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec tion.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma
tion signals. "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" "Flash when lock/unlock"
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and steering wheel settings The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions selected last are stored for the currently used remote control. When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure that
the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or objects damaged when the seat is moved back.
The adjustment procedure is interrupted: When a seat position switch is pressed. When a button of the seat, mirror, and steer
ing wheel memory is pressed briefly.
Activating the setting 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Last seat position auto."
Malfunction If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un locked with the remote control, the battery may be discharged or there may be interference from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the door lock using the key.
Seite 37
37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: FCC ID: LX8766S. LX8766E. LX8CAS. LX8CAS2. MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful interfer
ence, and this device must accept any interference re
ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Do not lock from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.
Remove the key before pulling the door handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.
In some country-specific versions, the alarm system* is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock.
Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock the vehicle using a key via the door lock on the driver's door.
Locking the doors and tailgate at once* In some vehicle equipment versions, only the driver's door can be locked via the door lock. To lock all doors and the tailgate at once:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using the button for the central locking system in the interior.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle. Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door from the outside.
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the remote control.
Opening and closing: from the inside
Seite 38
38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Op en
in g
an d
cl os
in g
Unlocking and opening* Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or
Pull the door opener twice individually on each door: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.
Locking and unlocking Press the button in the vehicle. The doors and the tailgate are locked or
unlocked when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. Select the desired function:
"Lock if no door is opened" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened.
"Lock after start. to drive" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away.
Doors Automatic Soft Closing* To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed automatically.
Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Tailgate Opening
Opening the small tailgate The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available be fore opening.
Press the button on the tailgate, arrow 1. Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second and re lease.
Push the button in the driver's foot well.
The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is sta tionary, provided that the tailgate has not been locked.
Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec tion.
Seite 39
39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Opening the large tailgate Note the opening height of the large tail gate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result.
Press the button on the tailgate, arrow 2, and open the tailgate.
Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec tion.
Closing
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tail gate.
Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the tail
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Do not place the remote control in the cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control may be locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.
Automatic Soft Closing To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly only. It is closed automatically.
Locking the vehicle*
Press the button on the open tailgate. The vehicle is locked completely.
Automatic trunk lid operation*
Adjusting the opening height You can set how far the large tailgate should open.
Adjusting the opening height When adjusting the opening height, en
sure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/ 10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling may not be high enough for the open tailgate if the load situation changes.
1. "Settings" 2. "Tailgate"
Seite 40
40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Op en
in g
an d
cl os
in g
3. Turn the controller until the desired opening height is selected.
Opening the large tailgate Note the opening height of the large tail gate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result. Adjust the opening height of the large tailgate according to the given situation.
The large tailgate opens automatically to the ad justed opening height.
Press the button on the exterior of the tail gate, arrow 2.
Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and re
lease. Pressing the button again stops the motion. The opening process is interrupted as well: When starting the engine. When the vehicle starts moving. By pressing the button in the driver's foot
well.
By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate.
Opening the large tailgate further
Press and hold the button on the inside of the large tailgate, arrow 2, to open the large tailgate to the maximum opening height. Releasing the button stops the motion.
Closing the large tailgate
Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of the large tailgate. The tailgate closes automatically. Pressing again stops the motion.
With Comfort Access: Press the button on the open tailgate.
Seite 41
41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Tailgate closes automatically and the vehi cle is locked.
Press the button on the exterior of the tail gate, arrow 2. Pressing again stops the motion.
The closing operation is interrupted: When starting the engine. The vehicle starts off with jerks.
Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the tail
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Do not place the remote control in the cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control may be locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.
Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and smooth motion.
Do not operate the tailgate manually if it is blocked
If the tailgate is blocked, do not operate it man ually as the tailgate may otherwise become damaged and injury may result. Contact your service center.
Locking separately The tailgate can be locked separately, using the switch in the front center armrest.
The tailgate is locked, ar row 1. The small and large tailgates are locked.
The tailgate is unlocked, ar row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the tailgate and disconnects it from the central locking system. When the center armrest is locked, the tailgate cannot be accessed. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service. The infra red remote control can be handed out without the key.
Emergency unlocking*
Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The tailgate is unlocked.
Comfort Access* The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Comfort Access supports the following func tions: Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. Convenient closing. Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
Seite 42
42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Op en
in g
an d
cl os
in g
Starting the engine.
Functional requirements There are no external sources of interfer
ence nearby. To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle. The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds. The engine can only be started if the remote
control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access.
Unlocking
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre sponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the button. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con
sumers are switched off before locking the ve hicle.
Convenient closing Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and hold. In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof* are closed.
Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure that
no one becomes trapped.
Unlocking the tailgate separately Press the middle button on the exterior of the tailgate, refer to page 39, to open the small tail gate. This corresponds to pressing the button. Press the right-hand button on the exterior of the tailgate to open the large tailgate. With automatic trunk lid operation*: This corresponds to pressing the button.
Do not place the remote control in the cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control may be locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.
Malfunction Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use a key in the door lock. To subsequently start the engine, hold the re mote control against the marked area on the steering column, refer to page 33.
Seite 43
43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Alarm system* The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to: Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate. Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
sensor, refer to page 45. Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the car.
Interruptions in battery voltage. The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: By sounding an acoustic alarm. By switching on the hazard warning system. By flashing the high beams.
Arming and disarming the alarm system
General information When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock*, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some country-specific versions.
Tailgate and armed alarm system The tailgate can be opened using the remote control, even if the alarm system is armed. Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second and re lease. The small tailgate opens slightly.
With automatic trunk lid operation*: Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second and release. The large tailgate opens automatically.
Note the opening height of the large tail gate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when
the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni tored again by the alarm system. The hazard warning system flashes once. In some vehicle equipment variants, the tailgate can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first.
Panic mode* Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.
Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle using the remote control. With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the
remote control with you, pull on the door handle.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror
The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed.
The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se cured. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. The interior motion sensor is not active.
The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with.
Seite 44
44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Op en
in g
an d
cl os
in g
The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine is started, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof* must be closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together, such as in the fol lowing situations: In automatic car washes In duplex garages. During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer. When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control twice in succession.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec onds and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Power windows General information
Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the power windows and injure themselves.
Opening
Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held.
Press the switch beyond the resist ance point. The window opens automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Closing Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held.
Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion. Convenient operation, refer to page 36, via the remote control. Convenient closing, refer to page 43, with Com fort Access*.
Pinch protection If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted. The window reopens slightly.
Seite 45
45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.
Window accessories Do not install any accessories in the range
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.
Closing without the pinch protection system
Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec tion.
Safety switch The following functions can be locked simulta neously, using the switch: Opening and closing of the rear windows
using the switches in the rear. Operation of the roller sunblinds* using the
switches in the rear. Adjustment of the power rear seats*. Adjustment of the power head restraints* in
the rear.
Switching on and off Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transporting
children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without supervision.
Roller sunblinds* General information The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children, for example, from op erating the roller blinds using the switches in the rear. Press the safety switch in the driver's door. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on. If you are no longer able to move the roller blinds after having activated them consecutively a number of times, the system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys tem cool. The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low in terior temperatures.
Driver's door controls
Roller blinds for rear side windows Press the button.
Seite 46
46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Op en
in g
an d
cl os
in g
Rear door controls
Roller blind for the side windows Press the button.
The roller blind can only be extended or re tracted when the side window is closed.
Raising and lowering the roller blinds together
Press the button.
Panoramic glass sunroof* General information The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be operated together or separately, using the same switch. The glass sunroof is operational when the igni tion is switched on.
Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.
Tilting the glass sunroof Push switch upward briefly. The closed roof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens slightly.
The opened roof closes until it is in its tilted position. The sliding visor stays completely open. Pressing the switch again closes the sliding visor al most completely.
Opening/closing the sliding visor Press the switch in the de
sired direction to the resist ance point and hold it there. The sliding visor moves while the switch is being held.
Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point. The sliding visor moves automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de scribed under Sliding visor.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch twice in succession in the desired direc tion past the resistance point.
Seite 47
47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
The glass sunroof and sliding visor move to gether. Pressing the switch again stops the mo tion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 36, via the remote control. Convenient closing, refer to page 43, with Com fort Access*.
Comfort position In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise in the passenger com partment. Every time the glass sunroof is opened or closed completely, it stops in the comfort position. If desired, continue the movement by pressing the switch.
Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the tilted position during closing. The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.
Closing without the pinch protection system For example, if there is an external danger, pro ceed as follows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist ance point and hold. Pinch protection is limited and the roof re opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure After a power failure during the opening or clos ing process, the roof can only be operated to a limited extent.
Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running.
Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Press the switch up and hold it until the initialization is complete: Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed when the sunroof and sliding visor are completely closed.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Seite 48
48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Op en
in g
an d
cl os
in g
Adjusting Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital con tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: Safety belts, refer to page 55. Head restraints, refer to page 56. Airbags, refer to page 89.
Front seats Adjusting
General information Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving. The seat could respond with unexpected move ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.
Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.
The seat setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automati cally retrieved if this function, refer to page 37, was activated.
At a glance: partially powered seats
1 Thigh support* 2 Tilt 3 Forward/backward 4 Lumbar support* 5 Height 6 Backrest
Adjustments in detail: partially powered seats
Forward/back: Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly to make sure it engages prop erly.
Seite 49
49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Seat tilt: Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat en gages properly.
Height: Move the button in the required direction.
Backrest tilt: Move the button in the required direction.
Overview: Power* seats
1 Lumbar support* 2 Backrest width* 3 Shoulder support* 4 Backrest 5 Forward/back, height, tilt 6 Thigh support*
Adjustments in detail: power* seats 1. Forward/back.
2. Height.
Seite 50
50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ad ju
st in
g
3. Seat tilt.
4. Backrest tilt.
5. Thigh support*.
Lumbar support* The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.
Press the front/rear section of the switch. The curvature is increased/decreased.
Press the upper/lower section of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/down.
Backrest width*
Change the width of the backrest using the side wings to adjust the lateral support.
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Shoulder support*
Also supports the back in the shoulder area: Results in a relaxed seating position. Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Seite 51
51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Active seat* Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain.
Press the button. The LED lights up.
Front seat heating*
Switching on Press the button once for each temper ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.
Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out. The temperature may be reduced or seat heat ing may be switched off entirely to save battery power.
Temperature distribution* The heating action in the seat cushion and back rest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate" 2. "Seat heating distribution" 3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution.
Front active seat ventilation* The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are cooled by means of integrated fans. The ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e.g., if the vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures.
Switching on Press the button once for each ventila tion level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit.
After a short time, the system automatically moves down one level in order to prevent ex cessive cooling.
Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.
Seite 52
52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ad ju
st in
g
Rear seats Adjusting
Overview: manual seats
1 Forward/backward 2 Backrest
Settings in detail: manual seats Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the seat while
driving. Otherwise, the restraining effect of the seat can be limited in an accident.
Forward/back: Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the level, move the seat forward or back slightly until it engages.
Backrest tilt: Pull the lever and apply your weight to the back rest or lift it off.
Overview: Power* seats
1 Forward/backward 2 Shoulder support 3 Backrest, head restraint The seats cannot be adjusted if the safety switch for the power windows has been pressed.
Settings in detail: Power* seats 1. Forward/back.
Seite 53
53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
2. Backrest tilt.
3. Head restraint.
Shoulder support*
Also supports the back in the shoulder area: Results in a relaxed seating position. Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Reset* to standard position
Maintain pressure on the button until the system completes the adjustment.
Rear seat heating*
Switching on Press the button once for each temper ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.
Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution* The heating action in the seat cushion and back rest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate" 2. "Seat heating rear"
Seite 54
54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ad ju
st in
g
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution.
Active seat ventilation*
Switching on Press the button once for each ventila tion level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit.
Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.
Safety belts Seats with safety belt The vehicle has four* or five* seating positions, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
Notes Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated into the rear seat, are for passen gers sitting on the left and right.
The center rear seat belt buckle marked with the letters CENTER* is solely intended for the center passenger.
One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.
Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im pact and injure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka ble objects, or be pinched.
Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.
Seite 55
55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for the driver's and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac tivated if objects are placed on the front pas senger seat.
Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.
Front head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.
Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap proximately at ear level.
Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain severity, the active head restraint automatically reduces the distance from the head.
Reduced protective function Do not use seat or head restraint cov
ers. Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
on the head restraints. Only attach accessories approved by BMW
to the seat or head restraint. Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will be impaired and the personal safety of the occupants will be endangered.
Seite 56
56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ad ju
st in
g
Adjusting the height: manual head restraints
To raise: pull. To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the height: Electrical* head restraints
Adjusting electrically.
Distance to back of head: manual head restraints
Forward: pull. Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Distance to the back of the head: power* head restraints The head restraint is automatically repositioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.
Adjusting the side extensions*
Fold forward for increased lateral support in the resting position.
Removing The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.
Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap proximately at ear level.
Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Seite 57
57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Adjusting the height: manual head restraints
To raise: pull. To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the height: Electrical* head restraints
Move the switch in the desired direction.
Adjusting the side extensions*
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the rest ing position.
Removing: manual head restraints Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as pos sible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able.
Removing: power* head restraints For technical reasons, the head restraint cannot be removed.
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory* General information
Front
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions can be stored and re trieved for each remote control. The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored.
Seite 58
58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ad ju
st in
g
Rear
Two different seat positions can be stored and retrieved.
Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position.
3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally: Press the button again. The LED goes out.
Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an accident.
Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Switch off the ignition. 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. The procedure stops when a switch for adjust ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is completed.
Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: Open or close the door or tailgate. Press a button on the remote control. Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors Exterior mirrors
At a glance
1 Adjusting 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor* 3 Fold in and out*
General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.
Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.
The mirror setting is stored for the remote con trol currently in use. When the vehicle is un locked via the remote control, the position is au
Seite 59
59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
tomatically retrieved if the setting for this function is active.
Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direction in which the button is pressed.
Storing positions* Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 58.
Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor* When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out* Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. For example, this is advantageous In car washes. In narrow streets.
For folding back mirrors that were folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de pending on the width of the vehicle.
Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed. Photocells are used for control in the Interior rear view mirror, refer to page 61.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect
From behind when driving at night: turn the knob.
Seite 60
60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ad ju
st in
g
Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature*
Photocells are used for control: In the mirror glass. On the back of the mirror. For proper operation: Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel General information
Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.
Manual steering wheel adjustment
1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Power* steering wheel adjustment
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di rections.
Storing the position Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 58.
Steering wheel heating*
Switching on/off Press the button.
On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 61
61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Transporting children safely The right place for children Note
Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.
Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in jury in an accident. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.
Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re straint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 90.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.
Installing child restraint fixing systems Before mounting If the rear seat backrests are adjustable: Before mounting child restraint fixing systems, return all of the rear seat backrests to the basic position.
Notes Manufacturer's information for child re straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro tective effect can be impaired.
On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front pas senger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto matically, refer to page 90.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.
Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the middle po sition to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. Do not change the seat position and height after this.
Seite 62
62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Tr an
sp or
tin g
ch ild
re n
sa fe
ly
Backrest width* Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory posi tion.
Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Note Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix ing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufacturer; oth erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Correctly engage the lower LATCH an chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fix ing system is resting snugly against the back rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix ing system, pull the belt away from the child re straint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo cated behind the seat cover between the back rest and the seat cushion at the marked loca tions.
Seite 63
63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Exposing the lower LATCH anchors
1. Reach between the seat cushion and the backrest.
2. Detach the seat cover from the Velcro fas tener.
3. Pull the seat cover forward.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Move the seat to its rearmost position. 2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest
back slightly. 3. Fold the leather cover on the seat forward. 4. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system. 5. Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors
have properly engaged and that the child re straint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest.
6. After mounting the system, move the back rest back up slightly so that the child re straint fixing system rests against the back rest.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems on power rear seats* 1. Before mounting, adjust the seats to their
basic position, refer to page 54. 2. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system. 3. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap
Mounting points
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are two outer or three mounting points for child re straint fixing systems with a tether strap. Fold up the middle mounting point.
LATCH mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.
Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not routed over the head restraints or sharp edges and is free of twisting on its way to the upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can not properly secure the child restraint fixing sys tem in an accident.
1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint. 3 Hook for upper retaining strap
Seite 64
64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Tr an
sp or
tin g
ch ild
re n
sa fe
ly
4 Mounting point/eye 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Raise the head restraint. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint. 3. Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to the
mounting eyes. 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down. 5. Lower the head restraint.
Locking the doors and windows Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down. The door can now be opened from the outside only.
Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 46.
Seite 65
65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Driving Start/Stop button The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed when you press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. The ignition switches off automatically: When the vehicle is locked, if the low beams
are switched on. Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be started.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.
Ignition off Press the Start/Stop button again, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.
Transmission position P with the ignition off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.
When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system, the ignition switches off auto matically.
Radio ready state Activate radio ready state: When the ignition is switched off: press ON/
OFF button on the radio. When the engine is running: press START/
STOP button. Some electronic systems/power consumers re main ready for operation. Radio ready state switches off automatically: After approx. 8 minutes. When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
Starting the engine General information
Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.
Unattended vehicle Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten tial source of danger.
Seite 66
66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng
Before leaving the car with the engine running, set the parking brake and place the transmission in position P or neutral to prevent the car from moving.
Frequent starting in quick succession Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, and there is the danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod erate engine speeds.
Starting the engine Press on the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button. The engine is cranked until it starts.
Engine stop General information
Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the windows and injure them selves.
Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehi cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.
Before driving into a car wash In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car wash, heed the information regarding Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 269.
Switching off the engine 1. Engage transmission position P with the ve
hicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The radio ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Parking brake The concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked. Engine switched off: the parking brake acts
on the rear wheels. Engine running: the parking brake acts on
the disc brakes of the front and rear wheels via the hydraulic brake system.
The parking brake can be set manually or auto matically: Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch. Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold.
Setting Pull the switch. The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up in red. The parking brake is set. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Seite 67
67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehi cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.
While driving Use while driving: Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the button is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig nal sounds and the brake lamps light up. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing Press the switch while the brake pedal is pressed or transmission position P is en
gaged. The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released. Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot release the parking brake.
Manual release The parking brake can be released manually in the event of a power failure or electrical fault.
Before releasing, secure the vehicle against rolling
Before releasing the parking brake manually, and whenever you park the vehicle with the parking brake released, ensure that position P of the automatic transmission is engaged.
Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the inclination of the road, e.g., with a wheel chock; otherwise, there is the danger of the ve hicle rolling.
Unlocking 1. Raise the rear cargo floor cover in the cargo
area, arrow 1, and fasten it with a retaining strap.
2. Remove the release tool from the tool kit.
3. Take out the floor trim in the cargo area, re moving the clips with a screwdriver, arrows.
Seite 68
68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng
4. Hook the release tool into the release point, arrow.
5. Forcefully pull the release tool up against the resistance until you notice a marked in crease in the resistance and the parking brake releases audibly.
Have the malfunction corrected If the parking brake has been released
manually in response to a malfunction, only technicians can return it to operation. Have the malfunction corrected by your service center.
After a power failure Only put the parking brake into operation after a power failure
The parking brake should only be put into oper ation again if it was manually released due to an interruption in the supply of electrical power. Otherwise, it cannot be ensured that the parking brake will function properly.
Putting the parking brake into operation 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the switch while the brake is de pressed or transmission position P is en gaged.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be put into operation. Any sounds associated with this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models.
Automatic Hold
The concept This system assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the brake, such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving away.
For your safety Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated and the parking brake is set: The engine is switched off. A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled. The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
using the parking brake.
Seite 69
69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
The indicator lamp switches from green to red and the letters AUTO H go out. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Before driving away: Release the parking brake manually. Reactivate Automatic Hold.
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, engage position P of the automatic trans mission and ensure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
Activating This function can be activated when the driver's door is closed and the safety belt is fastened, or while driving.
Press the button. The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
The indicator lamp lights up. Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating Press the button again. The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, press on the brake pedal to deactivate it. When the parking brake, refer to page 67, is set manually, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto matically.
Driving Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto matically secured against rolling when it stops.
The indicator lamp lights up in green. Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically. The indicator lamp goes out. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Before driving into a car wash Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.
Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the en gine is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold. Automatic Hold remains activated during an en gine stop brought about by the Automatic En gine Start/Stop Function*.
The indicator lamp changes from green to red. The parking brake is not set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is coast ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti vated.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot release the parking brake.
Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving it.
Seite 70
70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng
Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the re sistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated:
1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher
High beams, arrow 1. Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.
Switching on
Press the wiper levers up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.
Seite 71
71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the wiper levers down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Brief wipe: press down once. To switch off normal wipe: press down once. To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Rain sensor
The concept The time between wipes is controlled automat ically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
Press the button on the wiper lever. When activated, the wipers move over the wind shield once. The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam age could be caused by undesired wiper activa tion.
Rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel.
Clean the windshield, headlamps*
Pull the lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.
Seite 72
72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng
Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated* whenever the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example.
1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.
1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are ready for operation.
Washer fluid General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
it away from sources of ignition. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the instructions on the container.
Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser voir. Fill with water and if required with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec ommendations. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio.
Capacity Approx. 5.3 US quarts/ 5 liters
Automatic transmission with Steptronic Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for ward gears are available.
R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll.
Seite 73
73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 66, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: After the engine is switched off, if the car is
in radio ready state, refer to page 66, or if the ignition is switched off, refer to page 66, and if position R or D is engaged.
If the ignition is switched off and position N is engaged.
If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and transmission position R or D is engaged.
Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position Transmission position P can only be disen
gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed.
With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start driv ing
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pres sure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Engaging D, R and N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position.
Press the Unlock button to: Engage R. Shift out of P.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Seite 74
74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D. DS is displayed in the instrument cluster. This position is recommended for a perform ance-oriented driving style.
Activating the M/S manual mode Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D. Push the selector lever forward or backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g., M1. To shift down: press the selector lever for
ward. To shift up: press the selector lever back
ward. The transmission only shifts up or down if the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the engine speed is too high, the transmission does not shift down. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Ending the sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is dis played, for instance, P.
Seite 75
75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Displays Instrument cluster At a glance
1 Fuel gauge 2 Speedometer 3 Indicator/warning lamps 4 Tachometer 5 Oil temperature
6 External temperature* 7 Electronic displays 8 Miles, trip miles 9 Clock* 10 Display/reset miles
Fuel gauge The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary. Notes on refueling, refer to page 240.
Range After the reserve range is reached: A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
The remaining range is shown on the computer.
When a dynamic driving style is used, such as when corners are taken rapidly, engine functions are not ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range 30 miles/
50 km, or engine functions are not ensured and damage may occur.
Seite 76
76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Di sp
la ys
Displaying the cruising range 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators"
The range is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds.
Normal operating tempera ture: the pointer is in the mid dle or in the left half of the temperature display.
Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem perature end. A Check Control message is displayed in addition.
Coolant temperature Should the coolant, and with it the engine, be come too hot, a Check Control message is dis played. Check the coolant level, refer to page 254.
External temperature
External temperature warning If the display drops to +37 / +3 , a signal sounds. A Check Control message is dis played. There is the increased danger of
ice.
Ice on roads Even at temperatures above +37 /+3 ,
there can be a risk of ice on roads. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan ger of an accident.
Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel con sumption. You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmen tally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel consumption 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators"
Seite 77
77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
The bar display for the current fuel consumption is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery The energy of motion of the ve hicle is converted to electrical en ergy while coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be low ered.
Odometer and trip odometer Odometer, arrow 1. Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Display/reset miles Press the knob. When the ignition is switched
off, the time, external temper ature and odometer are dis played.
When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.
Time The time is displayed at the bot tom of the instrument cluster. Setting the time and time format, refer to page 81.
Date The date is displayed in the in strument cluster. Setting the date and date format, refer to page 81.
Selection lists in the instrument cluster The concept
The following can be operated using the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel: Current audio source. Redial on telephone*. Activation of the voice activation system*.
Activating a list and creating the setting
Press a button on the right side of the steering wheel or turn the thumbwheel to activate the re quired list. Create the setting using the thumbwheel.
Computer Indication in the info display
The information from the com puter is shown in the Info display in the instrument cluster.
Seite 78
78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Di sp
la ys
Calling up information on the info display
Press the computer button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig nal lever calls up the following information on the info display: Range. Average fuel consumption. Average speed. Date*. Time of arrival*
When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.
Distance to destination* When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.
Arrow view of navigation system* When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.
Adjusting the info display You can select what information from the com puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.
1. "Settings" 2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes.
Average fuel consumption This is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated on the basis of various distances.
Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine stopped do not enter into the calculation.
Resetting average values Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever.
Distance to destination* The distance remaining to the destination is dis played if a destination is entered in the naviga tion system* before the trip is started. The distance to the destination is adopted au tomatically.
Seite 79
79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Time of arrival* The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en tered in the navigation system* before the trip is started. The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit Display of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued. Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/ 5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.
5. Press the controller. The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning" 4. Press the controller.
Applying your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed" 4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit.
Resetting values The average fuel consumption and average speed can be reset. Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever.
Trip computer There are two types of computer. "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary. "Trip computer": the values provide an over
view of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill.
Display on the Control Display Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Seite 80
80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Di sp
la ys
Resetting the fuel consumption or speed 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" 3. "Cons." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Settings on the Control Display Time
Setting the time zone* 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time zone" 4. Select the desired time zone. The time zone is stored.
Setting the time 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed.
5. Press the controller. 6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed. 7. Press the controller. The time is stored.
Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Date:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year. The date is stored.
Setting the date format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format.
Seite 81
81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog* Voice dialog for the voice activation system*, refer to page 26.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis tance and temperature:
1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright ness is set.
5. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use. Depending on the light conditions, the bright ness control may not be clearly visible.
Service requirements Display
The driving distance or the time to the next service is displayed briefly after the ignition is switched on. The current service require
ments can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist. Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto matically transmitted to your service center be fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re quest, refer to page 232.
Seite 82
82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Di sp
la ys
Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a le gally mandated inspection is approaching. Please make a service appointment.
The service deadline has al ready passed.
Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections. Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly.
1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" 4. " Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" 6. Create the settings. 7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request* Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto
matically transmitted to your service center be fore a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified.
1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"
Check Control The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display*. In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Dis play.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
Seite 83
83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages Addition information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. The supplementary text of ur gent messages is displayed automatically. It is shown on the Control Display.
Symbols Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected. "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the Check Control message in the integrated owner's manual.
"Service request" Contact the service partner.
"Roadside Assistance" Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button on the turn signal lever.
Some Check Control messages are dis played continuously and are not cleared un til the malfunction is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis played again automatically.
Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion Malfunctions indicated during a trip are dis played again after the ignition is switched off.
Seite 84
84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Di sp
la ys
Lamps At a glance
1 Rear fog lamps* 2 Front fog lamps* 3 Automatic headlamp control / adaptive light
control* / high-beam assistant* / welcome lamps / daytime running lights*
4 Lamps off / daytime running lights* 5 Parking lamps / daytime running lights* 6 Low beams / welcome lamps / high-beam
assistant* 7 Instrument lighting
Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control Parking lamps Switch position : the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 86.
Low beams Switch position with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in position or : the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un locked.
Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
Setting the duration 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Pathway light.: s"
4. Set the duration.
Seite 85
85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Automatic headlamp control Switch position : the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi light or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually un der these conditions.
Daytime running lights* With the ignition switched on, the daytime run ning lights light up in position 0, or . After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in position .
Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.
Adaptive light control* The concept Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road. In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.
Controls
Activating Switch position with the ignition switched on. The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals.
Seite 86
86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
La m
ps
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the adaptive light control directs light towards the front pas senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is active.
Self-leveling headlights The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the light distribution to the contours of the road. The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to avoid blinding oncoming traffic and tilted in de pressions to increase visibility.
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos sible.
High-beam Assistant* The concept When the low beams are switched on, this sys tem automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation al lows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the High-beam Assistant
1. Turn the light switch to or . 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When the lights are switched on, the
high beams are switched on and off automati cally. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
Switching the high beams on and off manually
High beams on, arrow 1. High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2. To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits Personal responsibility The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man ually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.
The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation. In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on freeways.
Seite 87
87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres ence of highly reflective signs.
At low speeds. When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror. Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear.
Fog lamps Front fog lamps* The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 86, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lamps.
Instrument lighting Adjusting
The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel.
Interior lamps General information The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automati cally. The brightness of some of these lamps is influ enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting.
1 Interior lamps 2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and off Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. To clear this setting: press the button.
Reading lamps Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps.
Seite 88
88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
La m
ps
Safety Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 2 Front airbag, front passenger 3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag 5 Knee airbags
Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade quate restraint.
Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.
Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.
Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags
Keep at a distance from the airbags. Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
There should be no people, animals, or ob jects between an airbag and a person.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.
Seite 89
89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instru ments and mobile phones.
Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.
Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack ets, over the backrests.
Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.
Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Do not remove the steering wheel. Do not apply adhesive materials to the air
bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.
Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.
Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered; oth erwise, there is the danger of burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un desired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.
Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag system
When the ignition is switch on, the warn ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the op
erational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning In radio ready state, the warning lamp does
not come on. The warning lamp lights up continuously.
When there is a malfunction, have the air bag system checked immediately
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as ex pected in the event of an accident despite cor responding severity of the accident.
Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas senger seat is occupied by measuring the re sistance of the human body. The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated ac cordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.
Seite 90
90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Sa fe
ty
Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions under Children on the front passenger seat.
Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un less they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
Do not place any objects on the front pas senger seat.
Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac tivated or deactivated.
The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passen ger side are not activated.
The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated.
The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, especially in the child seats that were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front pas senger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag The strength with which the driver's and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver's and front passenger seats. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a corresponding message appears on the Control Display.
Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Con trol Display.
1. Move the respective seat forward all the way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.
Seite 91
91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.
Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM* The concept The tire inflation pressure is measured in the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirements The system must have been reset when the in flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pres sure and after every tire or wheel change.
System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.
The system does not operate correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated despite correct tire inflation pres sures. The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire: For a mounted wheel without TPM electron
ics. When the TPM is disturbed by other sys
tems or devices with the same radio fre quency.
Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM" The status is displayed.
Status display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires. A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account. A correction is only necessary if this is indicated by the TPM
Wheels, green The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target state.
One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
in several tires. The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus warns based on the infla tion pressures initialized last.
A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys tem is being reset.
Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: TPM is being reset. Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency. Malfunction.
Seite 92
92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Sa fe
ty
For Canadian models: additional information The status display additionally shows the cur rent tire inflation pressures and tire tempera tures. When correcting the tire inflation pressures, note the following: The tire pressure increases as the tire temper ature increases. Therefore, only correct the tire inflation pres sure when the tire is at the ambient temperature. Compare the displayed tire temperature with the external temperature in the instrument clus ter.
Resetting the system Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.
1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset". 6. Drive away. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed. After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla tion pressures are applied as set values. The re setting process is completed automatically dur ing driving. The tires are shown in green and "TPM active" is shown on the Control Display. The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the process resumes auto matically. If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are displayed in yellow.
Low tire pressure message The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus warns based on the infla tion pressures initialized last.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg ular tires* or run-flat tires*. Run-flat tires, refer to page 249, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec essary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires* 1. Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them re placed if necessary.
Run-flat tires* You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not continue driving without run-flat tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.
Seite 93
93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/ 80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater de pending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop erties.
Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con tinue driving, and contact your service center.
Message when the system was not reset A Check Control message is displayed. The system detected a wheel change but was not reset. Warnings regarding the current tire inflation pressure are not reliable. Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system.
Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat
tire can be detected. Display in the following situations: A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if necessary. Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center. TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys
tem again. Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la bel, you should determine the proper tire infla tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
Seite 94
94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Sa fe
ty
or more of your tires is significantly under-in flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating prop erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then re main continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal function indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Lane departure warning* The concept This system issues a warning at speeds above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about to leave the lane on roads with lane markings. The steering wheel begins vibrating gently. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Display
Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated. Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning The warning ends: Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. When returning to your own lane.
Seite 95
95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
When braking hard. When using the turn signal.
System limits Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.
The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,
diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas.
When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.
In tight curves or on narrow lanes. When the lane markings are covered by ob
jects. When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you. When driving toward bright lights. When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.
Malfunctions
Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra tion causes the system to overheat. This causes the lane departure warning to be come deactivated. Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing the button.
Camera
The camera is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror. Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear.
Active Blind Spot Detection* The concept
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The system indicates whether there are vehicles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the situa tions described above. The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Seite 96
96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Sa fe
ty
Switching on/off
Press the button.
On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Display
Information stage The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.
Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly. The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit ical zone.
System limits Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering wheel, as you may lose control over the vehi cle.
The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
Malfunctions
Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra tion causes the system to overheat. This causes Active Blind Spot Detection to be come deactivated. Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing the button.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: Dirty or icy bumper. Stickers on the bumper. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional.
Seite 97
97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: FCC ID: NBG009014A. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful interfer
ence, and this device must accept any interference re
ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Brake force display* The concept
During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up.
During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition.
Seite 98
98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Sa fe
ty
Driving stability control systems Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak ing. The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en gine.
Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.
Adaptive brake assistant In combination with the Active Cruise Control, this system ensures that the brakes respond even more rapidly when braking in critical situa tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer to page 112.
Drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradients. The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive away with
out delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driving
without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes at individual wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF DSC can be deactivated. To do this, activate the DSC OFF program. This is performed via the Dynamic Driving Con trol, refer to page 103.
Indicator/warning lamps The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Seite 99
99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized. The system ensures maximum forward momen tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but driving stability is limited. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un der the following special circumstances: When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads. When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces. When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control The system can be deactivated/activated via the TRACTION and SPORT+ programs of the Dy namic Driving Control, refer to page 103.
xDrive* xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis tributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface.
HDC Hill Descent Control* The concept HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto matically controls vehicle speed on steep down hill gradients. Without requiring brake applica tion, the vehicle moves at slightly more than twice walking speed.
You can activate the Hill Descent Control at speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed to approx. twice walking speed and then keeps its speed constant. While you are actively braking, the system is on standby. The system does not brake the vehicle during this time.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed You can specify your desired speed in the range from approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/ 25 km/h using the rocker switch of the cruise control on the steering wheel. You can change the vehicle speed by pressing on the accelerator lightly.
Press up the rocker switch to the point of resistance: the speed increases gradually.
Press up the rocker switch past the point of resistance: the speed increases while the rocker switch is pressed.
Press down the rocker switch to the point of resistance: the speed decreases gradually.
Press down the rocker switch past the point of resistance: when driving forward, the speed decreases to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed decreases to ap prox. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Seite 100
100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng st
ab ili
ty co
nt ro
l s ys
te m
s
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED above the but ton lights up.
Deactivating HDC Press the button again and the LED goes out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Display in the instrument cluster The selected speed is displayed in the speedometer. Green: the system is actively
braking the vehicle. Orange: the system is on
standby.
Malfunction A message is displayed in the instrument clus ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated brake temperatures.
Adaptive Drive* The concept Adaptive Drive* includes the following systems: Dynamic Drive, refer to page 101 Dynamic Damping Control, refer to
page 101 The system increases driving stability and driv ing comfort.
Dynamic Drive* The concept Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers. Driving stability and driving comfort are in creased under all driving conditions. The system utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear axles that react immediately to all driving situa tions.
Programs The system offers two different programs. The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv ing Control, refer to page 103.
SPORT Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
NORMAL Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
Dynamic Damping Control* The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav eling on uneven road surfaces. The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style.
Programs The system offers three different programs. The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv ing Control, refer to page 103.
SPORT Consistently sporty control of the shock absorb ers for greater driving agility.
Seite 101
101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
NORMAL Balanced tuning between the COMFORT and SPORT programs.
COMFORT Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort.
Integral Active Steering* The concept Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac tive Steering and rear axle steering. Active Steering varies the steering angle of the wheels in relation to the steering wheel move ment as a function of the speed. At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g., in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e., steering becomes more direct. The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a direction opposite to the front wheels. At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas ingly reduced. The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as the front wheels. In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can specifically steer the front and rear wheels to stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes, e.g., when braking where road conditions differ on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Initializing In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi alize the Integral Active Steering.
The warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.
1. With the engine running, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right several times in a uniform manner until the warning lamp disappears.
2. Have the system checked if the warning lamp does not go out after moving the steer
ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering wheel is at an angle.
Using snow chains Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated when using snow chains, refer to page 250.
Programs The system offers two different programs. The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv ing Control, refer to page 103.
SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active Steering for greater driving agility.
NORMAL Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering for optimal traveling comfort.
Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle re sponds more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher speed range. The stability-enhancing intervention may be de activated. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. Have the system checked.
Self-leveling suspension* The concept The self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicle height and ground clearance constant. The height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main tained at a predefined level under all load con ditions. The system ensures consistent comfort by keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit uations.
Seite 102
102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng st
ab ili
ty co
nt ro
l s ys
te m
s
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. A mal function has occurred in the self-leveling sus pension. Vehicle handling may be altered and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced. Visit your nearest service center.
Dynamic Driving Control* The concept Dynamic Driving Control can be used to adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. Several pro grams are available for this purpose; they can be activated using the two Dynamic Driving Control buttons.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program
DSC OFF TRACTION
SPORT+ SPORT NORMAL COMFORT*
For Dynamic Damper Control*, the lower button is labeled with COMFORT.
Automatic program change The system automatically switches to NORMAL in the following situations: Failure of Integral Active Steering*. Failure of Dynamic Damping Control*. The vehicle has a flat tire.
DSC OFF Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering* system are only performed by the rear axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Activating DSC OFF Press and hold the button, but not lon ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the in strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in the tachometer. The DSC system is switched off.
Deactivating DSC OFF Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis played in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF is activated.
TRACTION Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv ing stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.
Activating TRACTION Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the tachom
eter. The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus ter lights up.
Deactivating TRACTION Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the tachometer.
Seite 103
103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
The indicator lamp lights up: TRACTION is activated.
SPORT+ Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus pension during limited driving stabilization. Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks.
Activating SPORT+ Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the tachometer
and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in strument cluster.
Indicator/warning lamps SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy namic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for greater driving agility with maximum driving sta bilization. The program can be configured to individual specifications. The configuration is stored for the remote con trol currently in use.
Activating SPORT Press the button repeatedly until SPORT appears in the tachometer.
Configuring SPORT When the display is activated on the Control Display, refer to page 105, the sport program can be set to individual specifications. After the sport program is activated, select "Configure SPORT mode" on the displayed panel and configure the program. Optionally, the sport program can be configured before it is activated:
1. "Settings" 2. "SPORT mode"
3. Configure the program. This configuration is retrieved when the sport program is activated.
NORMAL For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta bilization.
Activating NORMAL Press the button repeatedly until the program display in the tachometer
goes out.
In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 103.
COMFORT* Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort with maximum driving stabilization.
Activating COMFORT Press the button repeatedly until COM FORT appears in the tachometer.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Selected program The selected program is dis played in the tachometer.
Seite 104
104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng st
ab ili
ty co
nt ro
l s ys
te m
s
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a list of the select able programs.
Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed briefly on the Control Display. To do so, make the following settings:
1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Display driving settings"
Seite 105
105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Driving comfort Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC* The concept This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automati cally on clear roads. To the extent possible, the system automatically adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system au tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to accelerate if operated accordingly. Even if some time passes before the vehicle drives away again, the BMW can still be accel erated automatically and simply. As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the desired speed. The speed is also maintained on downhill gra dients, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient.
Buttons at a glance
1 System on/off, interrupt 2 Resume speed 3 Store speed* 4 Reduce distance 5 Store, maintain/change speed 6 Increase distance
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control
Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up and the marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used.
Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
If switching off the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button.
If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once.
Seite 106
106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
The displays go out. The stored desired speed and distance are deleted.
Interrupting When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The system is automatically interrupted if: The brakes are applied. The clutch pedal is depressed. Transmission position D is disengaged. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated. DSC is actively controlling stability. The safety belt and the driver's door are
opened when the vehicle is standing. The system has not detected objects for an
extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit tle traffic without road edge line markings.
Radar sensor is soiled.
Maintaining/storing the speed Press the button*.
When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the instrument cluster, refer to page 108. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.
Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur rent speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.
Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other wise, there is the danger of an accident occur ring.
Speed differences Great speed differences with vehicles
driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly ap proaching a truck or when another vehicle swerves into your own lane, cannot be compen sated for by the system.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ 1 km/h.
Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. max. adjustable speed: 110 mph/180 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action.
Distance Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traffic
and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.
Seite 107
107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Reduce distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 109, is dis played in the instrument cluster.
Increase distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 109, is dis played in the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and distance
While driving Press the button with the system switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: When the system is switched off. When the ignition is switched off.
While standing Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against rolling.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, engage position P of the automatic trans mission and apply the parking brake. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill. Green mark in the speedometer during a
brief idle phase: The vehicle ahead of you drives away while the mark is green: your vehicle accelerates without anything having to be done.
Switch to orange of the mark in the speed ometer after approx. 2 sec.: The vehicle ahead of you drives away, while the mark is orange: in order to accelerate, briefly press the accelerator or press the RES button or SET button.
Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that the vehicle ahead of you has driven off. You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle:
1. Press the button to call up a stored desired speed.
2. Release the brake pedal. 3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the
RES button or the rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Display of desired speed 2 Distance to vehicle ahead of you 3 Vehicle symbol 4 Brief status display
Desired speed
Marking in the speedometer The marking lights up in
green: the system is active. The marking lights up in or
ange: the system has been interrupted.
The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.
Brief status display Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the system
Seite 108
108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
requirements for operation are currently not met.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on.
The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated be cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is deactivated be cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away.
Indicator/warning lamps Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.
The vehicle symbol lights up in orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for op erating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively assume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: You are requested to intervene by brak
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
System limits
Speed range Best results are achieved when using the sys tem on well-developed roads and highways. The desired speed can be selected between 20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h. The system can also be activated when station ary. Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa tion when using the system.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for instance might not be detected.
Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca
pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Deceleration The system does not decelerate when a sta tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,
Seite 109
109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic congestion. The system also does not respond to: Pedestrians or similarly slow road users. Red traffic lights. Stationary objects. Cross traffic. Approaching traffic.
No warnings A warning may not be issued when ap
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.
Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis tance. This also applies to major speed differ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves into another lane from behind a stopped vehicle, you yourself must react, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. In tight curves, situations may result due to the restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all, or not until after a considerable delay.
When approaching a curve, the system may re act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to
Seite 110
110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator pedal is released, the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be hind bumps in the road.
Radar sensor
Position
Radar sensor
Dirty or covered sensor A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec tion of vehicles. If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re
move layers of snow and ice carefully. Do not cover the view field of the radar sen
sor.
Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example. A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails.
For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID: OAYARS3-A Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful interfer
ence, and this device must accept any interference re
ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note To reduce electromagnetic effects, please use properly. The standard SAR value is 2.0 W/kg; the tested value of this product is 0.751 W/kg. NCC declaration:
1. Companies or persons without authoriza tion should not change the frequency, in crease the power, or change the character istics or functions of the original design of low-power radio frequency devices with type approval.
2. Low-power radio frequency devices should not impair legal communication or flight safety. If this type of impairment is detected, the device should be switched off immedi ately. In this case, please contact the man ufacturer and only use the product after the problem has been corrected.
3. The "legal communication" specified above refers to communication in accordance with telecommunication regulations. Low-power devices should withstand interference from legal communication and ISM devices.
Seite 111
111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Collision warning with braking function* The concept The system issues a two-phase warning of a danger of collision at speeds above approx. 10 mph/15 km/h. The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.
It responds to stationary or moving objects that are within the detection range of the radar sys tem.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought into contact with an object, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings.
Warning stages
Prewarning This warning is issued, for example, when there is the impending danger of a collision or the dis tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed. The acute warning prompts the driver to inter vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is accompanied by a braking intervention. The braking intervention is executed with lim ited braking force and for a brief period only. The intervention cannot bring the vehicle to a com plete standstill.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 99, is switched on.
Adapting your speed and driving style The acute warning does not relieve the
driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic condi tions.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov ing the steering wheel. When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the collision warning with braking function to prevent undesired interventions. The braking function is deactivated if the DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is deactivated.
Switching the warning function on/off
Press the button
On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Configuring the prewarning After the warning function is switched on, the following can be set via the iDrive: The prewarning can be switched on/off. The time of the prewarning can be set. These settings have no effect on the time of the warning from the Active Cruise Control* that prompts the driver to intervene or brake.
Seite 112
112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
Display The collision warning can be issued in the in strument cluster, in the Head-up Display*, and acoustically.
Instrument cluster The vehicle lights up in red: prewarning
The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning You are requested to intervene by brak
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
Adapting your speed and driving style The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.
System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Detection range The detection capacity of the radar sensor and the collision warning has limitations. This may result in the warning not being issued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: Slow moving objects when you approach
them at high speed. Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
your vehicle. Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Pedestrians.
Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In tight curves. If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
Prewarning sensitivity If the prewarning setting is too sensitive, there may be an excess of false warnings.
Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable con
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant speed, for instance: On curvy roads. In heavy traffic. On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on
a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
Controls
Buttons at a glance
1 System on/off, interrupt 2 Resume speed
Seite 113
113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
3 Store speed* 4 Store, maintain/change speed
Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used.
Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Press the button.
If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
Interrupting When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if: The brakes are applied. The clutch pedal is depressed. Transmission position D is disengaged. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated. DSC is actively controlling stability. HDC is activated.
Maintaining/storing the current speed Press the button.
When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the speedometer, refer to page 115. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.
Change, maintain speed The rocker switch can be pressed while inter rupted to maintain and store the current speed.
Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other wise, there is the danger of an accident occur ring.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ 1 km/h.
Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it accelerates or deceler ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the re sistance point causes the vehicle to accel erate more rapidly.
Seite 114
114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
Resuming the desired speed Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Display of desired speed 2 Indicator lamp 3 Brief status display
Desired speed Display in the speedometer:
The marking lights up in green: the system is active.
The marking lights up in or ange: the system has been interrupted.
The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.
Brief status display Brief display in the speedometer:
Selected desired speed
If --- appears briefly, conditions may not be ad equate to operate the system.
PDC Park Distance Control* The concept In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the backup camera*, refer to page 119, can be switched on.
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of* or behind your vehicle are indicated with: Signal tones. Visual display.
Measurement Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors in the bumpers. The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: By the front* sensors and the two rear cor
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/
1.50 m.
System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range. Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.
Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active. For technical reasons, the system may other wise be too late in issuing a warning.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance: With tow bars and trailer hitches. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With low objects. With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Seite 115
115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected.
False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: In heavy rain. When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice. When sensors are covered in snow. On rough road surfaces. In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages. In heavy exhaust. Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.
Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running.
Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out: After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for
ward. Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv
ing forward. Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object becomes, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded. The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds: If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen sors.
If moving parallel to a wall. The signal tone is switched off: When the vehicle moves away from an ob
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone, refer to page 173. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Dis play before a signal tone sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.
Seite 116
116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
If the backup camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Zoom view* On the left part of the display screen, the vehicle is shown enlarged.
Transmission position D engaged: front area of the vehicle.
Transmission position R engaged: rear area of the vehicle.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.
On the Control Display, the areas in front of and behind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using a pressure washer, keep the
sprayer moving and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm from the sensors.
Surround View* The concept Surround View includes the following systems: Backup camera, refer to page 119. Side View, refer to page 121. Top View, refer to page 117. It assists the driver when parking, maneuvering and on blind driveways and intersections.
Top View* The concept Top View assists you in parking and maneuver ing. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose.
Capturing the image The image is captured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup camera. The range equals: approx. 10 ft/3 m to the side.
Seite 117
117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex terior mirrors are detected early.
System limits Top View cannot be used in the following situa tions: With a door open. With the tailgate open. With an exterior mirror folded in. In poor light. A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations.
Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the cameras.
Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive.
Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out: After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for
ward. Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv
ing forward. Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer to page 118.
Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is ac tivated.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to Top View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via iDrive With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Brightness With Top View switched on:
Seite 118
118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast With Top View switched on:
1. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way.
The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space actually needed to the side of the vehicle. The pathway line is dependent on the cur rent steering angle and is continuously ad justed with the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines" Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
Cameras
The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 271.
Backup camera* The concept The backup camera provides assistance in park ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
System limits Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the backup camera.
Detection of objects High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.
Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The backup camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive.
Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out: After approx. 33 ft/10 m when driving for
ward. Above approx. 9 mph/15 km/h when driving
forward. Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Seite 119
119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer to page 121.
Assistance functions
Functional requirement The backup camera is switched on. The tailgate is fully closed.
Pathway lines
Can be shown in the backup camera image when in transmission position R.
Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.
Are dependent on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steer ing wheel movements.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 121.
Turning circle lines
Can be shown in the backup camera image.
Show the course of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed when the steering wheel is turned.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 121.
Parking using pathway and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle
lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in the backup camera image.
Seite 120
120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown.
Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.
Showing the parking aid lines "Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.
Showing the obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via iDrive With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Brightness With the backup camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast With the backup camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 271.
Side View* The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected relatively late from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehicle record the traffic situation on each side.
System limits The maximum recording range of the camera is 330 ft/100 m.
Display The images from both cameras are shown si multaneously on the Control Display.
Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re sult from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the Side View cameras.
Switching off automatically System switches off: above approx. 9 mph/ 15 km/h. Switch on the system again if necessary.
Seite 121
121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Display on the Control Display The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display.
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness With the Side View switched on:
1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast With the Side View switched on:
1. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Cameras
The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 271.
Night Vision with pedestrian detection* The concept Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night vision system. An infrared camera records the area in front of the vehicle and displays the image on the Con trol Display. The picture is a heat image. The system has an integrated pedestrian detection function that detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system.
Personal responsibility Night Vision cannot replace the driver's
personal judgment of the visibility conditions and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the actual visibility conditions must always be the basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted; otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.
Seite 122
122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
Heat image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of view of the camera. Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects, a dark appearance. The ability to detect an object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to detect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are switched on. A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a fraction of a second.
Pedestrian detection
The pedestrian detection and warning system only operates in darkness and only when a heat image is displayed. Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system. People detected by the system are displayed with a slight yellow hue.
Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian detection system operates within a range of ap prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m.
Environmental influences can limit the availabil ity of pedestrian detection. If pedestrian detection is not available, a symbol is displayed in the heat image. This symbol disappears when the function be comes available again.
Warning of people in danger
If the system detects a person in the defined area in front of the vehicle and if there is the dan ger of a collision with this person, a warning symbol appears in the Control Display and Head-up Display*. Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
Seite 123
123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas. Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle. Expanded area 2 to the right and left. The entire area moves along with the vehicle in the direction of the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for example.
Symbols This symbol is displayed when a person is detected in the central area, arrow 1, immediately in front of the vehicle.
This symbol is displayed when a person detected in the extended area, arrow 2, is moving from the right or left to the
central area.
Display in the Head-up Display* The warning is simultaneously dis played in the Head-up Display and in the Control Display. The displayed symbol
can vary with the people detected. For people located in the central area, the distance to the person is indicated by the size of the symbol.
System limits
Basic limits System operation is limited in situations such as the following: On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
When the camera is dirty or the protective glass is damaged.
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian detection Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de tection function, even if they are clearly visible in the image. Limited pedestrian detection: When people are fully or partially covered,
especially when their heads are covered. When people are not in an upright position,
e.g., when lying down. Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles). After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
Activation/deactivation
Press the button.
Display Night Vision with pedestrian detection is not available on the rear screen*.
Settings via iDrive With Night Vision switched on:
1. Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec tion.
2. Press the controller. 3. Open the desired menu item.
"Brightness"
Seite 124
124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
"Contrast" "Pedestrian detection"
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Camera
Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper ation. The camera is automatically heated when the external temperatures are low. The camera is automatically cleaned together with the headlamps. Clean the lens, refer to page 271.
Head-up Display* The concept
This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. In this way, the driver can get information with out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis play is influenced by:
Certain sitting positions. Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis
play. Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. Wet roads. Unfavorable light conditions. If the image is distorted, check the basic set tings.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Display
1 Lane departure warning* 2 Active Cruise Control* 3 Desired speed 4 Navigation system* 5 Speed The collision warning*, Night Vision* pedestrian warning, or Check Control messages are dis played briefly if needed.
Seite 125
125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Selecting displays in the Head-up Display 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Displayed information" 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi tionally influenced using the instrument lighting, refer to page 88. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Adjusting the height 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Height" 4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double images from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced by a service center only.
Seite 126
126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Dr ivi
ng co
m fo
rt
Climate control Automatic climate control*
1 Air distribution, left 2 Temperature, left 3 AUTO program, left 4 Air volume, AUTO intensity, residual heat,
left 5 Remove ice and condensation 6 Maximum cooling 7 Display 8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right 9 AUTO program, right 10 Temperature, right
11 Air distribution, right 12 Seat heating*, right52 13 Active seat ventilation*, right52 14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu
lated-air mode 15 Cooling function 16 Rear window defroster 17 ALL program 18 Active seat ventilation*, left52 19 Seat heating*, left52
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution Press the button repeatedly to select a program:
Upper body region. Upper body region and footwell.
Footwell. Windows and footwell: driver's side only. Windows, upper body region and footwell:
driver's side only. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the conden sation sensor.
Seite 127
127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Temperature Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.
AUTO program Press the button. Air volume, air distribution, and tem
perature are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is di rected to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function, refer to page 129, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con trols the program so as to prevent window con densation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.
Air volume, manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase air volume.
The selected air volume is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. The air volume of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Defrosting windows and removing condensation
Press the button. Ice and condensation are quickly re
moved from the windshield and the front side windows.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active. If the windows are fogged over, additionally switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated- air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re gion. Open them for this purpose. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: At an external temperature of approx. 32 /
0 . When the engine is running. The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active.
Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:
LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
Seite 128
128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Cl im
at e
co nt
ro l
Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out side air and controls the shut-off automati cally.
Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO but ton on the driver's side to utilize the condensa tion sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.
Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.
Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified and
depending on the temperature setting warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, con densation water, refer to page 148, develops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
ALL program Press the button. The current settings on the driver's side
for temperature, air volume, air distribution, and AUTO program are transferred to the front pas senger side and to the left and right rear*.
The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side or in the rear* are changed.
Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior.
Functional requirement Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been
switched off. Warm engine. The battery is sufficiently charged. External temperature below 77 /25 .
Switching on 1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Press the right side of the button on the driver's side.
is shown on the display of the automatic cli mate control. The interior temperature, air volume and air dis tribution can be adjusted with the ignition switched on.
Switching off At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side.
on the display of the automatic climate control goes out.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off Complete system:
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's
side. On the front passenger side:
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the front
passenger side.
Seite 129
129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Switching on Press any button.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle. This combined filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance of your vehicle., refer to page 256
Ventilation Front ventilation
Thumbwheels* for adjusting the tempera ture, arrows 1. Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer.
Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar row 2.
Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 3.
Ventilation levels* Draft-free ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air current is fanned out.
Maximum air volume: Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is partially fanned out and partially bundled. This maximizes the air supply.
Direct ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is bundled and can be directed to a specific point.
Adjusting the ventilation Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.
Draft-free ventilation: Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in rear, center
Thumbwheels* for adjusting the tempera ture, arrows 1. Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer.
Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar row 2.
Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrow 3.
Lateral ventilation*
Thumbwheel for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrow.
Seite 130
130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Cl im
at e
co nt
ro l
Rear automatic climate control* At a glance
1 Temperature 2 AUTO program 3 Vent settings 4 Air volume, AUTO intensity 5 Display 6 Maximum cooling 7 Seat heating*54 8 Active seat ventilation*55
Note The air volume of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Switching the rear automatic climate control on/off 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Rear climate control" The rear automatic climate control is not opera tional if the automatic climate control is switched off or if the function for defrosting or defogging the windows is active.
AUTO program Press the button. Air volume, air distribution, and tem
perature are controlled automatically:
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is di rected to the upper body and into the footwell. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.
Temperature Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.
Manual air distribution The air distribution can be adjusted to individual needs.
Press the button repeatedly to select a program:
Upper body region. Upper body region and footwell. Footwell.
Air volume, manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase air volume.
Seite 131
131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
The selected air volume is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side.
Switching on Press any button.
Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated- air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re gion. Open them for this purpose. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: At an external temperature of approx. 32 /
0 . When the engine is running.
Parked-car ventilation The concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary. The system can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset switch-on times. It re mains switched on for 30 minutes. They can be operated via iDrive.
Parked-car ventilation Using the preset switch-on time or when oper ated directly: any external temperature. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on. The system continues to run for some time after being switched off.
Preselecting the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Seite 132
132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Cl im
at e
co nt
ro l
Interior equipment Integrated universal remote control* The concept This system can replace up to three different hand-held transmitters for various types of re mote-controlled equipment, such as garage doors or lighting systems. The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro grammed on one of the three memory buttons. The corresponding device can then be operated using the programmed memory button. The LED indicates that a signal is being trans mitted. When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro grams for security reasons.
During programming During programming and before activat
ing a device using the universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or ob jects in the range of movement of the remote- controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.
Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the instructions of the hand-held transmitter, the remote-controlled de
vice is generally compatible with the universal remote control. If you have any questions, please contact: Your service center. www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Programming
LED, arrow 1. Memory buttons, arrow 2.
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:
Press both outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes. All programs of the three memory buttons, arrow 2, are cleared.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the memory buttons.
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button of the hand-held transmitter and the memory button of the universal remote control. The LED flashes slowly.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step.
The device can be operated using the memory button with the engine running or the ignition switched on.
Malfunction If the device cannot be used after repeated at tempts at programming, please check whether the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an alternating code system.
Seite 133
133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
To do so: Read the instructions of the hand-held
transmitter. Press the memory button of the universal
remote control for an extended period. If the LED flashes rapidly for a brief period and then lights up continuously for approx. 2 sec onds, the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an alternating code system. In this case, program the memory buttons as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters Please obtain information on synchronizing the device in the operating manual of the device be ing set up. Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec ond person.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote- controlled device.
2. Program the universal remote control as de scribed above under Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Press and hold the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approx. 5 sec onds until the device to be adjusted is acti vated. If the device does not become activated, press and hold the button and watch the LED: If the LED lights up continuously, the
programming is completed. The device should become activated when the but ton is pressed briefly.
If the LED flashes for approx. 2 seconds and then lights up continuously, con tinue the programming procedure be ginning with step 4.
4. Locate the button on the receiver of the de vice to be set, e.g., on the drive.
5. Press the button on the receiver of the de vice to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
6. Press the programmed memory button of the universal remote control three times.
The device can be operated when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
Reassigning individual programs 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of
approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the memory buttons.
3. Press the memory button of the universal remote control.
4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit button on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step.
Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right memory buttons for ap prox. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored programs are deleted. The programs cannot be deleted individually.
Seite 134
134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
In te
rio r e
qu ip
m en
t
Ashtray/cigarette lighter* Front
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote con trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn them selves.
Rear
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying Take out the insert.
Connecting electrical devices Sockets The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 Watt at 12 V. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.
Front center console
Press on the cover. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.
Seite 135
135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
Cargo area Trunk cover
Note Do not deposit heavy objects Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on
the trunk cover. Otherwise, they could endanger occupants during braking and evasive maneu vers, for example.
Removing To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re moved.
1. Place your hands into the two recessed grips on the bottom of the cover.
2. Push up the cover. The cover can be stowed in the rear cargo area floor compartment, refer to page 142.
Installing 1. Insert the trunk cover into the two front re
taining pins.
2. Fold down the cover until it engages.
Through-loading system
General information The cargo area can be expanded by folding down the cargo partition and the rear seat back rest.
Seite 136
136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
In te
rio r e
qu ip
m en
t
The cargo partition and the rear backrest are subdivided at a ratio of 402040. You can also fold down the left and right sides separately.
Foldable rear backrests, manual
Pull the lever. The backrest folds forward. Fold the backrest back; the backrest engages in an upright position. Pull the lever again to adjust the backrest to the desired angle.
Locking the backrests Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
engage the seat backrests, locking them in place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac cident due to unexpected seat movement.
Foldable rear backrests, powered*
1 Fold backrest forward 2 Loading position 3 Basic position
Fold backrest forward Move the front seats to an upright position Before folding down the rear backrests,
ensure that the front seats are moved forward slightly and are in an upright position. Other
wise, the head restraint and screen could be damaged.
Press the button until the backrest is folded all the way forward.
Folding the backrest back Before anyone can be transported in the rear:
1. Put the rear seat backrests into their stand ard position.
2. For the best possible individual seat posi tion, adjust the inclination of the rear seat backrest if necessary.
Adjust the standard position of the rear seat backrest
Before transporting passengers in the rear and adjusting the rear seat backrest, set the rear seat backrest to its basic position. Otherwise, the rear seats may not effectively restrain passen gers in an accident if the backrests are not ade quately inclined.
Loading position Press the button. The seat moves for ward and the backrest moves to the ba
sic position. Comfortable seating is still possible although knee clearance is reduced.
Basic position Press and hold the button until the seat stops automatically in its basic position.
Operation of the rear backrest was deactivated After a brief period, operation of the rear back rest is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate operation: Open or close a door or the tailgate. Press a button on the remote control. Press the Start/Stop button.
Seite 137
137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Folding down the cargo partition Danger of pinching Before folding down the trunk partition,
ensure that the area of movement of the parti tion is clear. In particular, ensure that no one is located in the area of movement and that no one reaches into the area of movement of the trunk partition when the middle section is folded down. Otherwise, injury or damage may result.
1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 2. To release the cargo partition, pull the cor
responding lever in the cargo area. The cargo partition folds forward.
Unlatching center cargo partition
Press the opener toward the left.
Closing the cargo partition Fold back and engage the cargo partition.
Danger of pinching Before closing the trunk partition, make
sure that the closing path is clear; otherwise, in juries may result.
Ensure that the lock is securely engaged When folding back the backrest, be sure
that it locks in place securely. If it is not properly engaged, transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or eva sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu pants.
Loading position To expand the trunk, the cargo cover can be moved into a vertical position.
1. Move the rear backrest to the loading posi tion, refer to page 137.
2. To release the cargo cover, pull both levers in the trunk. The cargo cover folds into an upright position and rests against the rear backrest.
Repositioning Fold back the cargo cover and snap into place
Ski and snowboard bag* General information The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a protective jacket in the trunk. Follow the installation and operation instruc tions included in the protective jacket.
Seite 138
138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
In te
rio r e
qu ip
m en
t
Storage compartments Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail able in the vehicle interior: Glove compartment on the driver's and front
passenger side, refer to page 139. Storage compartment in the center console,
refer to page 141. Storage compartment in the center armrest,
refer to page 140, in the front and rear. Compartments in the doors. Pockets on the backrests of the front seats*. Net in the front passenger footwell.
No loose objects in the passenger com partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com partment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants for in stance during braking and avoidance maneu vers.
Glove compartment Front passenger side
Opening
Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Close the glove compartment again im mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.
Closing Fold up the cover.
USB interface for data transfer
Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: Personal Profile settings, refer to page 33. Music collection, refer to page 188. Observe the following when connecting: Do not use force when plugging the con
nector into the USB interface. Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface. Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Seite 139
139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Driver's side
Opening
Pull the handle.
Close the glove compartment again im mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.
Closing Fold up the cover.
Center armrest Front A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Press the buttons next to the lock.
Locking the storage compartment
The storage compartment in the armrest can be locked with an integrated key to separately se cure the tailgate, refer to page 42, for example.
After the storage compartment is locked, the re mote control can be handed out without the integrated key, refer to page 32, for instance at a hotel. This prevents access to the storage compart ment and to the cargo area.
Connection for an external audio device
This can be used to connect an external audio device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
AUX-IN port, refer to page 192. USB audio interface*, refer to page 193.
Rear A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats.
Seite 140
140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
St or
ag e
co m
pa rtm
en ts
Folding down
Pull on the opener and fold the armrest forward.
Opening Storage compartment in the rear center arm rest.
Push the button and fold open the cover.
Storage compartment in the center console
To open: press the button.
Cupholders Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.
Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam age.
Front
To open: press on the cover.
Rear In the front center armrest.
To open: press the button.
Clothes hooks The clothes hooks are located next to the grab handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear.
Seite 141
141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's vision.
No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas sengers during braking and evasive maneu vers.
Storage compartments in the cargo area Retaining straps Retaining straps on the left* and right side trim for fastening small objects.
Multi-function hook There are two multi-function hooks on the cargo area walls.
1. Open the holder by pressing on the button.
2. Press the bag handle into the holder from above.
Light and suitable objects only Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured.
Storage compartments in the floor
Rear compartment The trunk cover, refer to page 136, can be stowed in the rear compartment. To open the cover, pull upward on the handle, arrow 1. To close the cover, press downward until it locks. You can fix the cover in an upright position, if needed. To do so, unhook the right-hand retain ing strap and hook it into the rear of the cover.
Do not stow heavy objects Only stow light objects in the rear com
partment; otherwise, damage may occur.
Front compartment To open, reach into the recess and raise the handle, arrow 2. The cover can be completely removed.
Lashing eyes To secure the cargo, refer to page 149, there are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Seite 142
142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
St or
ag e
co m
pa rtm
en ts
Seite 143
143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Things to remember when driving Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: For gasoline engine, 4500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode for the initial miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.
Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe riod. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/ 300 km.
Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and discs. Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be ob served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes Closing the tailgate
Drive with the tailgate closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other
wise, in the event of an accident or braking or evasive maneuvers, passengers or other road users may be injured or the vehicle may be dam aged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the passenger compartment.
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: Close all windows and the glass sunroof*. Greatly increase the blower speed. Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. When driv ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot ex haust system and any highly flammable materi als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal injury as well as property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Seite 146
146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Th in
gs to
re m
em be
r w he
n dr
ivi ng
Climate control windshield*
The marked area is not covered with heat re flective coating. Use this area for garage door openers, devices for electronic toll collection, etc.
Climate control laminated tinted safety glass* The vehicle glass provides full protection against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the skin.
Mobile communication devices in the vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile commu nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the vehicle without connecting them directly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec tronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation generated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior.
Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.
Driving through water Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec trical systems and the transmission may be damaged.
Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces sary. The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, for example.
Seite 147
147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.
Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, resulting in a reduction in the brake system efficiency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down in the manual mode of the auto matic transmission, refer to page 73.
Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos sibly even brake failure.
Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable with the engine stopped.
Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are furthered by: Low mileage. Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all. Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, con densation water develops that exits underneath the vehicle. Therefore, traces of condensed water under the vehicle are normal.
Loading Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carrying
capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and in creases the rate at which damage develops in side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.
No fluids in the trunk Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve hicles placard*: The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve hicle and unstable driving situations may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.
Seite 148
148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Th in
gs to
re m
em be
r w he
n dr
ivi ng
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low as possible, ideally directly behind the cargo partition.
Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.
Cover sharp edges and corners.
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests, including the cargo partition, to stow cargo.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area
Securing cargo Smaller and lighter items: secure with re
taining straps or with a cargo net* or draw straps.
Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps*.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Securing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu pants.
Roof-mounted luggage rack Note Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Seite 149
149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Attachment Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps*
The anchorage points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors. Fold the cover outward.
Mounting Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising and opening the glass sunroof*.
Magnetic roof-mounted luggage rack Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof- mounted luggage racks cannot be mounted.
Loading Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight. Distribute the roof load uniformly. The roof load should not be too large in area. Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot
tom. Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with
ratchet straps. Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen tly.
Saving fuel General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors. The implementation of certain measures, driv ing style and regular maintenance can have an influence on fuel consumption and on the envi ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts following use Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass sunroof* Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before start ing on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.
Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Seite 150
150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Th in
gs to
re m
em be
r w he
n dr
ivi ng
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.
Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac celerator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle is switched off for only approx. 4 seconds. The Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function* of your vehicle automatically switches off the en gine during a stop.
Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear win dow defroster require a lot of energy and con sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop- and-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your serv ice center. Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys tem.
Seite 151
151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Navigation This chapter contains various examples of how the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Navigation* Navigation system General information The navigation system can determine the pre cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated.
Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradic tion between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.
Destination input Manual destination entry
General information The system supports you in entering street names and house numbers by automatically completing the entry and providing entry com parisons, refer to page 24. Stored town/city and street names can be called up quickly. If the existing entries should not be changed,
the entries for the state/province and town/ city can be skipped.
Destination guidance is started to the town/ city center if no street is entered.
Entering a state/province 1. Press the MENU button. 2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed state/province.
Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary. The list is narrowed down further with each entry.
3. Move the controller to the right. 4. Select the town/city name from the list. If there are several towns/cities with the same name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names. 2. Highlight the town/city. 3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code* 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis
played town/city. 2. Select the symbol.
Seite 154
154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Na vig
at io
n
3. Select the numbers. 4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities. 5. Highlight the entry. 6. Selecting an entry.
Entering a street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city. If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names. 2. Highlight the street. 3. Select the street.
Alternative: enter the street address and house number 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter the street as you would the town/city. 3. "House number" 4. Select the numbers. 5. Change to the list of house numbers. 6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Street does not exist in the destination city/town The desired street does not exist in the specified city/town because it belongs to another part of the city/town.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 4. Change to the list of street names. 5. Select "In" the displayed country.
All streets of the selected state/province are offered. The associated town/city is dis played after the street name.
6. Select the letters. 7. Change to the list of street names. 8. Highlight the street. 9. Select the street.
Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination" 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 160.
Address book
Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if these have been checked as destinations. If the mobile phone* does not display the contacts with addresses, they must first be
Seite 155
155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
checked as a destination, refer to page 231.
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with "A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
Storing the destination in the address book After entering the destination, store the desti nation in the address book.
1. Open "Options". 2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
3. Select an existing contact, if available. 4. "Business address" or "Home address" 5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name". 6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position The current position can be stored in the ad dress book.
1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position to contact"
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex isting contact from the list. Select the type of address and enter the first and last name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. Highlight the entry. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the destination The home address must be stored. Specify the home address, refer to page 230.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Seite 156
156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Na vig
at io
n
Last destinations
At a glance The destinations previously entered are stored automatically. The destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.
Calling up the last destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations"
Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Select the destination. 4. "Start guidance"
Editing the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
Special destinations
Opening the search for special destinations To select special destinations, e.g., hotels or tourist attractions:
1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of Interest" 3. Select the search function.
Online Search* 1. "Google Search" 2. Select a special destination. 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Start guidance"
A-Z search 1. "A-Z search" 2. "Town/City"
Select or enter the town/city. 3. "Category" 4. Select the category. 5. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple cat egory details can be selected. Move the controller to the left to leave the category details.
6. "Keyword" 7. Enter the keyword.
A list of the special destinations is displayed. 8. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connection can be established if necessary.
9. Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 160.
Seite 157
157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
"Start search": if a search term is not entered, the search is repeated with the previous search term.
Category search 1. "Category search" 2. "Town/City"
Select or enter the town/city. 3. "Category" 4. Select the category. 5. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple cat egory details can be selected. Move the controller to the left to leave the category details.
6. "Start search" A list of the special destinations is displayed.
7. Select a special destination. Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connection can be established if necessary.
8. Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 160.
Display of special destinations List of special destinations: special destinations are organized by distance and are displayed with a directional arrow to the special destination. on the split screen, special destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map view as symbols. The display depends on the scale of the map and the category.
Destination entry via BMW Assist* A connection is established to the Concierge service, refer to page 233.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Open "Options". 4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map view:
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display Points of Interest" 5. Select the setting.
Destination entry by map
Selecting the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is indi cated on the map.
3. "Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with crosshairs. To change the scale: turn the controller. To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction. To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and turn it.
Seite 158
158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Na vig
at io
n
Specifying the street If the system does not recognize a street, one of the following is displayed: The name of a street in the vicinity. The county. The coordinates of the destination.
Additional functions Additional functions are available on the inter active map after the controller is pressed.
Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 160.
"Exit interactive map": return to the map view.
"View in northern direction" or "View in driving direction"
"Display destination": the map section around the destination is displayed.
"Display current location": the map section around your current location is displayed.
"Find points of interest": the search for spe cial destinations is started.
Destination entry by voice*
General information Instructions for voice activation system, re
fer to page 25. When making a destination entry by voice,
you can change between voice operation and iDrive.
To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands
Saying the entries the town/city, street, and house number can
be entered as a single command*. Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in
tersections can be said as whole words* or spelled in the language of the system, refer to page 82. Example: to enter a town/city in a US state as a whole word, the language of the system must be English.
Spell the entry if the spoken language and the language of the system differ.
Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.
The options available for entering data de pend on the navigation data and the country and language settings.
entering an address using a command*
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Enter address 3. Wait for a request from the system. 4. Say the address in the suggested order. 5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system. If necessary, individually name the separate components of the address, e.g., the town/city.
Entering a town/city separately The name of the town/city can be said as a word* or spelled out. With the destination entry menu displayed:
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. City or Spell city. 3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
Seite 159
159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
4. Say the name of the town/city, or say at least the first three letters. Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit ies may be suggested.
5. Select the town/city. To select a recommended town/
city: Yes To select a different town/city: New
entry Select an entry: Entry ... e.g., entry 2 To spell an entry: Spell city
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same name: Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a list and displayed as one location followed by an ellipsis.
1. Select an entry: Yes or Entry ... e.g., En try 2.
2. Select the desired town/city.
Entering a street or intersection separately Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town/city.
Entering a house number separately Depending on the data in the navigation system, house numbers up to number 2000 can be en tered.
1. House number 2. Say the house number.
Say each digit separately. 3. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
Planning a trip with intermediate destinations
New trip A trip can be planned with several intermediate destinations.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Move the controller to the left if necessary. 4. "Guidance" 5. "Enter new destination" 6. Select the type of destination entry.
7. Enter the intermediate destination. 8. "Start guidance"
Entering intermediate destinations For a trip, a max. of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered.
1. "Enter new destination" 2. Select the type of destination entry. 3. Enter the intermediate destination. 4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is entered in the destination list and is highlighted.
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate destination is located in the desired position in the list.
6. Press the controller.
Starting the trip 1. After all intermediate destinations are en
tered, highlight the first destination. If the second destination, for example, is highlighted when destination guidance is started, the first destination is skipped.
2. "Start guidance" This symbol marks the active leg of the
trip.
Seite 160
160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Na vig
at io
n
Store the trip Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If necessary, delete existing trips to be able to store new trips.
1. Open "Options". 2. "Store trip" 3. Enter the name. 4. "OK"
Select the stored trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. Select a stored trip. 4. "Start guidance"
Reversing the direction of travel Intermediate destinations are displayed in re verse order in the list.
1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Intermediate destination options 1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. "Display all trip destinations" 4. Select an intermediate destination.
"Edit destination" "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po sition in the list.
"Delete dest. in the trip" "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.
Delete the stored trip 1. "Stored trips" 2. Highlight the desired trip. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
With the Professional navigation system: Open the last trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. "Last trip" 4. "Start guidance"
Destination guidance Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 154. 3. "Accept destination" 4. "Start guidance" The route is shown on the Control Display. The distance to the destination/intermedi
ate destination and the estimated time of ar rival are displayed in the map view.
The arrow view is shown in the instrument cluster, in the Head-up Display*, and on the Control Display where appropriate.
Terminating destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed. "Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria. The route criteria can be changed when the
destination is entered and during destina tion guidance.
Seite 161
161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Road types are part of the navigation data and are taken into consideration when plan ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
The recommended route may differ from the route you would take based on personal ex perience.
The settings are stored for the remote con trol currently in use.
Destination guidance with traffic bulletins, refer to page 167.
Changing the route criteria 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Route preference" 4. Select the criterion:
"Fast route": time-optimized route, being a combination of the shortest pos sible route and the fastest roads.
"Efficient route": optimized combi nation of the fastest and shortest route.
"Short route": short distance, irre spective of how fast or slow progress will be.
"Alternative routes": if available, alter native routes are suggested during ac tive route guidance. The individual sug gestions are highlighted in color.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if necessary: "Avoid highways": highways are
avoided wherever possible. "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
wherever possible.
"Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided where possible.
Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance: Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on
the Control Display. List of route sections. Map view, refer to page 163. Arrow view in the Head-up Display*, refer to
page 125.
Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance: Large arrow: current direction of travel. Small arrow: indicates the next change in di
rection. Intersection view. Lane information. Traffic bulletins. Distance to the next change in direction. Street name at the next change in direction.
Lane information On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes are marked in the arrow view by a triangle. Solid triangle: best lane. Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an
other lane change may be needed shortly.
Displaying list of route sections When the destination guidance is started, a list of route sections can be displayed. The driving distances and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. Mark route section.
The route section is displayed on the split screen.
Seite 162
162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Na vig
at io
n
Bypassing a section of the route Calculate a new route for a route section.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for"
4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo meters within which you would like to return to the original route.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be by passed:
1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for:" 4. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendation The remaining range is calculated, and if nec essary gas stations along the route are dis played.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of the gas stations is displayed. 4. Highlight a gas station.
The position of the gas station is displayed on the split screen.
5. Select the gas station.
6. Select the symbol. 7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started. "Add as another destination": the gas sta tion is added to the route.
Switching spoken instructions on/off The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Voice instructions"
Repeating spoken instructions 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Highlight the symbol. 4. Press the controller twice.
Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume button while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set.
Saving the spoken instructions on the programmable memory buttons The function for switching the spoken instruc tions on/off can be stored on a programmable memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac cess.
Map view Selecting the map view 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"
Seite 163
163 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
At a glance
1 Function bar 2 Route section with traffic obstruction 3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction 4 Planned route 5 Current location 6 Upper status field 7 Lower status field
Lines in the map Streets and routes are displayed in different col ors and styles depending on their classification. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con nections. Country borders are indicated by thin lines.
Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route indicate route sections with traffic obstructions, depend ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian gles indicates the direction of the obstruction. The traffic signs indicate the significance of the obstruction. Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
planned route or direction. Gray traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction. Traffic bulletins, refer to page 165.
Planned route After destination guidance is started, the plan ned route is displayed on the map.
Status fields Show/hide: press the controller.
Upper status field: time, telephone, and en tertainment details.
Lower status field: symbol for active desti nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins, time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Function bar The following functions are available in the func tion bar:
Symbol Function
Start/end destination guidance.
Switch spoken instructions on/ off.
Change the route criteria.
Search for a special destination.
Display the traffic bulletins.
Interactive map.
Set the map view.
Change the scale.
To change to the function bar, move the con troller to the left.
Changing the map section "Interactive map"
To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.
To shift the map diagonally: move the con troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing the scale 1. Select the symbol. 2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Automatically scaled map scale In the map view facing north, turn the controller in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis played. The map shows the entire route be tween the current location and the destination.
Seite 164
164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Na vig
at io
n
Settings for the map view The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" Set the map view. "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions. "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the setting is disregarded.
With the Professional navigation system: "Satellite images" Depending on availability and resolution, satellite images* are displayed in a scale of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to 1,000 km.
"Perspective view in 3D" Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins, refer to page 165. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.
Map view for split screen The map view can be selected for the split screen independently from the main screen.
1. Open "Options". 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen is selected. 4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale. 5. Select the map view.
"Arrow display" "Map facing north" "Map direction of travel" "Map view with perspective"
"Position" "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive
ways are displayed three dimensionally. Setting in some cases will affect the dis play in the Head-Up Display*.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" 6. To change the scale: select the split screen
and turn the controller.
Traffic bulletins* At a glance Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa tion of a traffic information service. Informa tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is updated continuously. Certain BMW models equipped with navi gation have the capability to display real- time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply: An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein. A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (Total Traffic Network) holds the rights to the traffic in cident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to re produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic in cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. (BMW NA) and Total Traffic Net work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith.
Seite 165
165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor mational only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed. C. The licensed material is provided to li censee as is, and where is. Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the li censed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the li censed material (including, without limita tion, that the licensed material will be error- free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, im plied or statutory, including, without limita tion, the implied warranties of merchanta bility, non-infringement fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade. D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or inci dental damages (including, without limita tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limita tions apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict li ability). Some states do not allow the exclu sion or limitation of incidental or consequen tial damages, so those particular limitations may not apply to you.
The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map by symbols.
The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are stored in a list.
The symbol in the function bar of the map view turns red if there are traffic bulletins that affect the calculated route.
Switching the reception on/off 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Open the traffic bulletins 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info"
First the traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis tance from the current position of the vehi cle.
4. Select a traffic bulletin. "More information": display additional
information. 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if required.
Traffic bulletins on the map "Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indication on the control display is switched to shades of gray. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in this setting. Symbols and special destinations are not displayed.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the lo cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis played.
Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
Seite 166
166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Na vig
at io
n
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route. Red: congestion. Orange: stop-and-go traffic. Yellow: heavy traffic. Green: clear roads. Gray: general traffic bulletins, e.g., construc
tion site. The displayed information depends on the par ticular traffic information service.
Filtering traffic bulletins You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the map.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Traffic Info categories" 5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis played on the map. Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route
are always shown. For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no
tify you of potentially dangerous situations, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid den.
Destination guidance with traffic bulletins
Semi-dynamic destination guidance When traffic bulletin reception is switched on, semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
The destination guidance system takes the available traffic information into account. A mes sage is displayed depending on the route, the traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes. A detour is suggested in the event of a traffic obstruction. In addition, distance and time dif ferences between the original route and the de tour are displayed. To accept the detour:
"Detour" In the event of special hazards, e.g., objects on the road, a message is displayed without a de tour suggestion. Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes sages are called up in the list.
1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info" 4. "Detour information" 5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. The system does not point out traffic ob
structions along the original route. Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
the map. Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu lated route may lead through the traffic ob struction.
Dangerous situations are displayed regard less of the setting.
To activate dynamic destination guidance:
1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Dynamic guidance"
Seite 167
167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Navigation data Information on the navigation data 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Navigation system version": information on
the data version is displayed.
Updating the navigation data
General information Navigation data and authorization codes are available from your service center. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be up dated. Depending on the data volume, a data up
date may take several hours. Update during the trip to preserve battery. During the update, only the basic functions
of the navigation system are available. The status of the update can be viewed. The system restarts after the update. The data carrier with the navigation data can
be removed after the update is complete.
Perform an update 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis
play. 3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed. After interrupting your trip, follow the instruc tions on the Control Display.
Viewing the status
1. Press the button. 2. "Navigation update"
What to do if... The current transmission position cannot be
displayed? The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region, is in a poor reception area, or the system is currently determining the posi tion. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky.
The destination without street information is not used for route guidance? When city has been input, no downtown can be determined. Input any street in the selected city and start destination guidance.
The destination is not used for route guid ance? The destination data is not contained in the navigation data. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.
Letters for destination input cannot be se lected? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a goal that is as close as possible to the original.
Is the map displayed in shades of gray? "Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indi cation on the control display is switched to shades of gray. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.
Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec tions? The area has not yet been fully recorded, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to cal culate a new route suggestion.
Seite 168
168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Na vig
at io
n
Seite 169
169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Entertainment The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio and television stations and playing CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Tone General information The sound settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Treble, bass, balance, and fader "Treble": treble adjustment. "Bass": depth adjustment. "Balance": left/right volume distribution. "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone settings.
4. To adjust: turn the controller. 5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer* Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Adjusting the equalizer 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Equalizer" 4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback, surround* Choose between stereo and multi-channel play back, surround.
Setting multi-channel playback, surround 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Surround"
Seite 172
172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
To ne
When surround is activated, multi-channel play back is simulated when a stereo audio track is played.
Volume "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control. "PDC": volume of the PDC signal* com
pared to the entertainment sound output. "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en tertainment sound output.
"Microphone": volume of the microphone* during a phone call.
"Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers* during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the respective paired telephone: "Microphone", "Loudspeak.".
Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting the tone settings 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Reset"
Opening the tone settings in the Options menu* 1. "CD/Multimedia" or "Radio" 2. If necessary, select additional entries, for ex
ample, "FM" or "CD/DVD". 3. Open "Options". 4. "Tone" 5. Set the desired tone.
Seite 173
173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Radio Controls
1 Change entertainment sources 2 Change station/track 3 Programmable memory buttons 4 Volume, on/off 5 Change wave band
Sound output Switching on/off When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.
Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.
AM/FM station Selecting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
All saved stations are stored for the remote con trol currently in use.
Changing the station via the button Press the button.
Storing a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Highlight the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period. 5. Select the desired memory location. The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the program mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency.
Seite 174
174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ra di
o
1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. "Manual" 4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: press the controller for an extended period.
RDS* RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave band. When playing a station with multiple frequencies, the system automatically switches to the frequency with the best reception, if needed.
Switching the RDS on/off 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
HD Radio reception* Many stations broadcast both analog and digital signals. License conditions
HD Radio technology manufactured under li cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For eign Patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "HD Radio Reception" The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital. In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. Due to time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.
Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the ar tist.
1. Select the desired station. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation This symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station name of the main station ends in HD1. Station names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.
1. Select the desired station. 2. Press the controller. 3. Select the substation. When reception is poor, the substation is muted for several seconds. If reception is interrupted for an extended period, it switches back to the main station.
Seite 175
175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Weather Band* General information The availability of the Weather Band and the number of available channels can vary depend ing on the region.
Switching on the Weather Band 1. "Radio" 2. "Weather band" 3. Select the desired channel.
Additional information Weather Band is a service of the National Oce anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA). Additional information on the Internet: www.nws.noaa.gov.
Satellite radio* General information The channels are offered in predefined pack ages. The packages must be enabled by tele phone.
Navigation bar overview
Symbol Function
Change the list view.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites category/ open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.
Enabling channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category"
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate gory.
5. Select the desired channel. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan nel enabled.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio"
Seite 176
176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ra di
o
3. Open "Options". 4. "Manage subscription"
5. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan nels.
Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels. The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Via iDrive 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate
gory. 4. Select the desired channel.
Via the buttons on the center console Press the button. The next channel is selected.
Via direct channel entry 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Set channel" 4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.
Storing a channel 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de
sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location. The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use. The channels can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first symbol on the navigation bar is pressed. Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Channel name
Artist
Track
Seite 177
177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Selecting a category 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category" 4. Select the desired category.
Timeshift Approx. one hour of the program being broad cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must be available. The stored audio track can be played with a de lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.
Opening the timeshift function 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift"
The red arrow shows the current playback position.
The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar. For live transmissions: "live".
Timeshift menu
Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Symbol Function
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac tivated
Automatic timeshift When the function is activated, audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of: Incoming and outgoing telephone calls. Activation of the voice activation system. Muting. The audio playback then continues with a time delay. To activate:
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift" 4. "Automatic time shift" To deactivate: "Automatic time shift".
Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game It is only possible to store favorites that are cur rently being broadcast. The channel information must be available.
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de
sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Seite 178
178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ra di
o
Storing the league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list.
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Manage favorites" 4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the league. 6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Opening the favorites If an activated favorite is played back, the fol lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec onds: "Favorite alert!".
"Favorites" Select the symbol while the message is shown.
The displayed favorite is played. If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All favorites currently being broadcast can be selected from a list.
Managing the favorites
Activating/deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor
ites. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Deleting favorites 1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Highlight the desired favorite. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Set jump" 5. Select the desired region. The region is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Jump to:" Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available. A new panel opens. Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast shortly.
Information is currently being broad cast.
Seite 179
179 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.
Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The update takes place automatically and may take several minutes.
Notes Reception may not be available in some sit
uations, such as under certain environmen tal or topographic conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages next to tall buildings or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference.
Stored stations General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio" 2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location. The list of stored stations is stored for the re mote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the program mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Deleting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"
Seite 180
180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ra di
o
CD/multimedia Controls
1 Change the entertainment source 2 CD/DVD* drive 3 Eject CD/DVD 4 Change station/track 5 Programmable memory buttons 6 Volume, on/off
Sound output Switching on/off When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.
Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.
CD/DVD* Playback
Filling the CD/DVD* player Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up. Playback begins automatically. Reading can take a few minutes with com pressed audio files.
Starting playback A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or DVD changer*.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD* player
... DVD changer*
CD/DVD player, rear*
Playable formats DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video*.
CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD*, SVCD*.
Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC*, M4A*.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button Press the button repeatedly until the desired track is played.
Seite 181
181 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Selecting a track via iDrive
Audio CDs
Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files Depending on the data, some letters and num bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor rectly.
1. Select the directory if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Displaying information on the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically: Interpret. Album track. Number of tracks on the CD/DVD*. File name of track.
Random playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD*. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files: All tracks in the selected directory are played in random order. Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed and the ignition is switched off.
Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.
Seite 182
182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
CD /m
ul tim
ed ia
Automatic repeat* The selected CDs or DVDs are repeated auto matically.
Video playback*
Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the information on the DVD.
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af rica
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
0 All regions
Playback The video image is displayed on the front Con trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/ h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the parking brake is set or if the automatic trans mission is in position P.
DVD video 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content. 4. "DVD menu"
VCD/SVCD 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select a CD with video content. 4. "Select track" 5. Select the desired track.
Video menu To open the video menu: turn the controller dur ing playback. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu.
Start playback.
Pause
Stop
Next chapter
Previous chapter
Fast forward
Reverse
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.
DVD menu 1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
Seite 183
183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
2. "DVD menu" The DVD menu is displayed. The display de pends on the contents of the DVD.
3. To select menu items: move the controller and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the controller and press it.
DVD/VCD settings For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; refer also to the information on the DVD.
Selecting the language* The languages that are available depend on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
Selecting the subtitles* The subtitles that are available depend on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles" 4. Select the desired language or "Do not
display subtitles".
Setting the brightness, contrast and color 1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Display settings" 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.
Selecting the zoom Display the video image on the entire screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options".
Seite 184
184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
CD /m
ul tim
ed ia
3. "Additional options" 4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting a track DVD video:
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed.
2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Select title" 5. Select the desired track. VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track" 2. Select the desired track.
Selecting the camera angle* The availability of a different camera angle de pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Viewing angle" 5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.
DVD changer*
In the glove compartment
Pull down the release cover. The DVD changer tilts down. To close: fold the DVD changer up until it en gages.
Fold up the DVD changer Always fold the DVD changer back up after
filling and emptying it; otherwise, the DVD changer could be damaged.
Controls and displays
1 Empty DVD compartments 2 LED on DVD slot 3 Buttons for DVD compartments 4 DVD slot 5 Fill DVD compartments
Filling the DVD compartments individually
1. Press the button.
Seite 185
185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
The LED on the first empty compartment flashes.
2. Select another compartment if necessary. 3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash. 4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and placed into the selected compartment.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.
Filling all empty DVD compartments
1. Hold the button down. The LEDs on the empty CD compartments flash.
2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin flashing and then insert each CD or DVD into the center of the slot. The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically and placed into the vacant compartments.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.
After they are inserted, it may take several mi nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.
Removing a single CD/DVD
1. Press the button. 2. Select the DVD compartment.
The CD/DVD is partially ejected. 3. Remove the CD/DVD.
Removing all CDs/DVDs
1. Hold the button down. 2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.
Malfunctions If all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap idly, a malfunction has occurred. To eliminate the malfunction:
1. Press one of the buttons:
The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected. 2. Remove the CD/DVD. The DVD changer is functional again after the LEDs stop flashing rapidly.
Audio playback* The audio track of a DVD can be played back even if video playback is not possible in the ve hicle. Only the main film without the previews or extras can be played back.
Starting playback A DVD is located in the DVD changer.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD.
Selecting a chapter using the button Press the button repeatedly until the desired chapter is played.
Selecting a chapter using iDrive 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. 4. Select the desired chapter.
Seite 186
186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
CD /m
ul tim
ed ia
Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.
Selecting the language* The languages that are available depend on the DVD.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Audio/language" 6. Select the desired language.
Notes
CD/DVD player and changer Do not remove the cover BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage may occur.
CDs and DVDs Use of CDs/DVDs Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be come detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrepar able damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam and no longer eject.
Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no longer eject.
General malfunctions CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/ DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes:
Home-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with
home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose.
Damage Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
over 122 /50 , high humidity or direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro tection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Media protected by this product - unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may
Seite 187
187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
only be used for private purposes. Copying of this technology is prohibited.
DTS Digital Surround Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Numbers: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other patents granted and registered in the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Music collection* Storing music
General information Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection on a hard disc in the vehicle and played from there. Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com
pressed audio format. If available, informa tion on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.
CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A*, and AAC* formats are stored. Individual tracks and directories can be deleted later, Delet ing a track and directory, refer to page 191. Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored but cannot be played back.
Backing up music data Regularly back up the music data; other
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard disk.
Music recognition technology and re lated data are provided by Gracenote.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec ognition technology and related content deliv ery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend ing. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Storing from a CD/DVD 1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "CD/DVD" 4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed and the first track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the storage process, the tracks are played in se quence. Observe the following during the storage proc ess: Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as this will interrupt the storage process. You can switch to the other audio sources without inter rupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD that have already been stored can be called up.
Interrupting storage 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD"
Seite 188
188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
CD /m
ul tim
ed ia
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing" The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 4. "Continue storing" Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin ning of the track at which storage was inter rupted.
Album information During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this informa tion is available in the vehicle database or on the CD. To update the database, contact your service center.
Storing from a USB device To store music, a suitable device must be con nected to the USB interface in the glove com partment. Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players with a USB interface.
Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with mul tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the USB audio interface in the center armrest.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter face in the glove compartment, refer to page 139.
2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "Music collection" 4. Open "Options". 5. "Music data import/export" 6. "Import music (USB)"
Playing music
Music search All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album, refer to page 190.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Music search"
Seite 189
189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
4. Select the desired category.
5. Select the desired entry: Select "A-Z search", refer to page 24,
and input the desired entry. Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play" The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Restarting the music search "New search"
Music search using spoken instructions* Instructions for the voice activation system, re fer to page 25.
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Music search 3. Open the desired category, e.g., Select
artist. 4. Say the desired entry in the list. 5. Select other categories if you wish. To select a track directly: Title .... Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in a single command.
Current playback The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search, or the album that was selected last.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Current playback"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50 The 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Top 50" 4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums All stored albums, listed in order of their storage dates.
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed.
Seite 190
190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
CD /m
ul tim
ed ia
The first track is played automatically, if pos sible.
4. Change directories if needed to select tracks. To go up a level in the directory: move the controller to the left.
Random playback All tracks of the selection are played back in ran dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album* The name of the album, if available, is automat ically entered when the album is stored. If the name is not available, it can be changed later if desired.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory A track cannot be deleted while it is being played. A directory cannot be deleted while a track from that directory is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the directory or track. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Free memory"
Seite 191
191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Music collection
Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored on a USB device. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device. Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur ing a long trip.
1. Starting the engine. 2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter
face in the glove compartment. 3. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Music collection" 5. Open "Options". 6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Storing the music collection in the vehicle When storing from the USB device, the existing music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export" 5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete music collection"
External devices At a glance
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface*
Mobile phone audio interface*
Bluetooth audio*
Rear AUX-IN port* on the left
Rear AUX-IN port* on the right
AUX-IN port
At a glance For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Recommendation: use medium tone and volume settings on the audio device. The tone depends on the quality of the audio files.
Seite 192
192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
CD /m
ul tim
ed ia
Connecting
The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest. Connect the headphones or line-out connector of the device to the jack plug.
Playback 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. If necessary "External devices". 4. "AUX front"
Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device. If this volume differs mark edly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. If necessary "External devices". 3. "AUX front" 4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller.
USB audio interface*/mobile phone audio interface*
At a glance It is possible to connect external audio devices. They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Connectors for external devices Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.
Connection via snap-in adapter when equip ped with extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or mobile phones.
Due to the large number of different audio devi ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured that every audio device/mobile phone is opera ble on the vehicle. Ask your service center about suitable audio de vices/mobile phones.
Audio files Standard audio files can be played back: MP3. WMA. WAV (PCM). AAC*, M4A*. Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB audio interface
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.
Seite 193
193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Connect using a flexible adapter cable. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB interface. The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is supported by the USB audio interface.
Connection of a USB device via the USB audio interface
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest. Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect the USB audio interface and the USB device against physical damage.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
After connecting for the first time Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type of music, as well as playback lists are transmit ted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks. During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.
Number of tracks Information from up to four USB devices or for approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist ing music tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man agement (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol.
The playback starts with the first track. On the split screen*, the CD cover for the music track might be displayed after a few seconds.
Track search Selection is possible via: Playback lists. Information: type of music, artist, and, if
available, composer, album, track. In addition, for USB devices: file directory
and, if available, composer. Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Search" 5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or
"Artist". All entries are displayed in a list. Open "A-Z search" and input the de
sired entry. When a letter is entered, the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
Seite 194
194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
CD /m
ul tim
ed ia
all results that contain that sequence are displayed.
Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist are to be displayed, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then dis played.
7. "Start play"
Restarting a track search "New search"
Playback lists Calling up playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Playlists"
Current playback List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Current playback"
Random playback The current list of tracks is played back in ran dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.
Video playback*
At a glance Video playback via snap-in adapter possible. They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Playback The video image is displayed on the front Con trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/ h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the parking brake is set or if the automatic trans mission is in position P.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Video" 5. Select the directory if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.
6. Select the desired video file to begin play back.
Video menu
Symbol Function
Next video file
Previous video file Double-click on an icon to play back previous video file.
Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme en vironmental conditions, such as very high tem peratures; refer to the audio device operating instructions.
Seite 195
195 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information on connection The connected audio device is supplied with
a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the device. Therefore, do not additionally con nect the device to a socket in the vehicle; otherwise, playback may be compromised.
Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.
Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB audio interface to re
charge external devices.
Bluetooth audio*
At a glance Music files on external devices such as audio
devices or mobile phones can be played back via Bluetooth. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source, refer to page 211.
The sound is output on the vehicle loud speakers.
The volume of the sound output is depend ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the volume on the device.
Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle.
Requirements The device is suitable. Information under
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. The device is ready for operation. The ignition is switched on. Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to
page 211, and on the device. Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
device, such as for a connection without
confirmation or visibility; refer to the device operating instructions.
A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass key. It is only required once for pairing.
Pairing and connecting Pairing a device To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi cle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.
5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer to the device operating instructions: for in stance, search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device display. Prompt via iDrive or the device to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
Seite 196
196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
CD /m
ul tim
ed ia
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
8. Select the desired functions with which the device is to be connected, for instance "Audio".
9. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the device is displayed as connected. White symbol : the device is active as an audio source. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer to page 198.
Connecting a specific device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source. Connecting is not possible when data is ex changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue tooth.
Requirements If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devi ces.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of paired devices.
5. Open "Options". 6. "Configure phone" 7. "Audio" 8. "OK"
Connecting the device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio source.
Playback
General information The display of music track information de
pends on the device. Operation can takes place on the device or
iDrive. Playback is interrupted when data is ex
changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth.
Starting playback 1. Connect the device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "External devices"
Seite 197
197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec essary.
Playback menu* Depending on the particular device, some of the functions may not be available.
Symbol Function
Next track Fast forward: press and hold the symbol.
Previous music track Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Disconnecting the audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. Highlight the desired device. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone"
6. "Audio" 7. "OK"
Unpairing a device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. 5. Open "Options". 6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if... Information on suitable devices can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 210. The device is not supported by the vehicle. Perform a software update*, refer to
page 199, if needed. The device could not be paired or connected. Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the device and via iDrive.
Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the device or vehicle? Delete connections with other devices if necessary.
Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining battery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap- in adapter or via the charging cable.
Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi ble that only one device can be connected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and pair and connect only one device.
The device no longer reacts? Switch the de vice off and on again.
Repeat the pairing procedure. Music cannot be played back. Start the program for playing back music
data on the device and select a track on the device if necessary.
Switch the radio off and on again. Music files can only be played back softly.
Seite 198
198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
CD /m
ul tim
ed ia
Adjust the volume settings on the device. Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed or by other messages on the device. Switch off the button tones and other signal
tones on the device. Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or traffic bulletin and is not resumed automatically. Switch the radio off and on again. Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is connected both via Bluetooth Audio and via the extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone*. Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection, refer to page 198, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.
Software Update* The vehicle supports various external devices depending on the current software version. With a software update, the vehicle can support new cell phones* or new external devices*. The updating of the software is done via: USB*.
Updates and related current information is available at www.bmw.com/update.
TeleService*. Existing software can be updated directly via the vehicle.
Displaying the current version The currently installed software is displayed.
1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Show current version" SelectDesired version* to displayAdditional in formation*.
Updating software via USB* The software may only be updated when the ve hicle is stationary.
1. Store the file for the software-update in the main director of a USB flash drive.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB in terface of the USB audio interface in the center armrest. An update via the USB in terface in the glove compartment is not pos sible.
3. "Settings" 4. "Software update" 5. "Update software"
6. If necessary. "USB". 7. "Start update" 8. "OK" All listed software updates are installed.
Updating software via TeleService* The software may only be updated when the ve hicle is stationary.
1. Switch on the ignition. 2. "Settings" 3. "Software update" 4. "Update software" 5. If necessary "TeleService". 6. If necessary, "Start update". 7. "Start update" 8. "OK" All listed software updates are installed. To interrupt updating: "Cancel".
Restoring the previous version If it should become necessary, the software ver sion prior to the last software update can be re stored.
Seite 199
199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
The previous version may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.
1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Restore previous version" 4. "OK" Double-click. All listed software updates are removed.
Note While the software is being updated or a previ ous version is being restoredBMW Assist*, Of fice functions* and the connected devices are temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes for the functions to become available again.
Seite 200
200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
CD /m
ul tim
ed ia
Rear entertainment* Controls
1 Screen, left 2 Screen, right 3 Center armrest, remote control 4 CD/DVD player
Rear CD/DVD player
1 CD/DVD slot 2 Eject CD/DVD 3 On/off, right 4 Headphone connection, right 5 RCA sockets 6 Headphone connection, left 7 On/off, left
Switching the system on/off Press the left or right side of the button on the CD/DVD player in the rear for the respective page.
Rear entertainment and screens are switched on/off. After switching off the ignition, the system must be switched on again.
Screens Adjusting
Danger of burns when screen is folded out Do not reach behind the screen; other
wise, there is the danger of getting burned. The back of the screen can become very hot.
To fold out: pull at the bottom edge. To fold in: press against the bottom edge.
Notes Do not cover lower screen edge, since this
is where the sensors and the infrared inter face are installed.
When loading the rear seats and adjusting the backrest of the front seat, fold in the screens.
When using the through-loading system, fold the screens down.
When cleaning the screen, follow the care instructions, refer to page 271.
Seite 201
201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Remote control In the center armrest in the rear
Storage is possible in a vertical or horizontal po sition in the center armrest.
Menu navigation
Press the but ton
Function
Operating concept as for the front controller. Turn the wheel: highlight a menu item. Press the center knob: con firm the selection. Pressing arrow keys corre sponds to moving controller: switching between panels.
Open the main menu.
Displays the previous menu.
Opens the "Options" menu.
Changes the station, track or chapter. Press and hold the button: fast forward/reverse.
Press the but ton
Function
Adjusts the volume.
Switches the volume adjust ment to the left/right. With Professional rear enter tainment*: Toggles between the screens.
The transmission time of the remote control is limited by law. To execute a function again, press or turn the required button again.
Replacing the batteries No rechargeable batteries Do not use rechargeable batteries, as
damage may result from the substances in the batteries.
1. Remove the cover. Press on the cover, ar row 1, and push forward, arrow 2.
2. Insert batteries of the same type. 3. Close the cover.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen ter or to your service center.
Controls Almost all functions can be operated in the same manner as they are in the front. Special features of operating the system in the rear are described here.
Seite 202
202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re ar
e nt
er ta
in m
en t
Audio/video playback
Audio Audio can be played back via rear entertainment from any source in the vehicle. Operation is the same as for the front audio play back, refer to page 181.
Video Video can be played back in the rear from the following sources: DVD changer*. Rear CD/DVD player. External device in rear. If a video image is being played back in the rear, the rear CD/DVD player cannot be selected in the front. Operation is the same as for the front video play back, refer to page 183.
Radio When the same radio source is selected in the front and rear (e.g., FM/AM), the same radio sta tion is played. Operation is the same as for the front radio, refer to page 174.
CD/multimedia
CD/DVD When the same audio source (front CD/DVD player, rear CD/DVD player, DVD changer) is se lected in the front and rear, the same material is played. Operation is the same as for the front CD/DVD, refer to page 181. Notes on CDs/DVDs, refer to page 187.
Music collection* Music can only be stored and data can only be exported and imported via the front CD/DVD player or the USB interface in the glove com partment.
When music collections are selected in the front and rear, they are played back separately. Operation is the same as for the front music col lection, refer to page 188.
Tone Only treble and bass can be set in the rear. The settings are made separately for the left and right headphones. Operation is the same as for the front tone, refer to page 172.
Contacts* Operation is the same as for the front contacts.
Navigation* Route planning can be performed separately on the left and right sides in the rear. Destination guidance can only be started from the front. Operation is the same as for the front navigation, refer to page 154.
Suggesting a destination A destination or trip can be sent to the front as a suggestion. The suggestion can be adopted, stored, or declined in the front. This function is not available with the following setting: "Driver control".
1. Enter the destination. 2. "Suggest destination"
BMW Assist* Operation is the same as for BMW Assist in the front, refer to page 232.
Adjusting The following settings are available: "Rear displays" "Language/Units": language can be set
globally for all screens. "Tone" If necessary. "Climate".
Seite 203
203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Vehicle information* Computer content can be displayed. Operation is only possible in the front.
Options menu The split screen is not available and there is no Integrated Owner's Manual. Operation is the same as for the front menu op tions, refer to page 21.
Enabling Enabling operation in the rear Only possible via the iDrive in the front.
1. "Settings" 2. "Allow rear control" 3. Select the desired priority.
Priority options
The driver has priority The source selected via iDrive in the front is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers and can be selected but not operated from the rear. Other audio or video sources can be oper ated.
Sound can only be output in the rear via headphones.
The source that is to be displayed in the rear can be set via the iDrive in the front.
To set the source in the rear via the iDrive in the front:
1. "CD/Multimedia" or"Radio" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Select rear source" 4. Select the desired audio or video source.
Same priority All audio and video sources can be operated
via the iDrive in the front and rear. Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
the source selected via the iDrive in the front is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Sound is output via loudspeakers: the source selected last via the iDrive in the front or rear is output via the vehicle loudspeak ers.
The rear has priority When the source selected in the rear is
played on headphones, it can be selected but not operated via iDrive in the front. Other audio or video sources can be operated.
Sound is output in the rear via headphones: the source selected via the iDrive in the front is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Sound is output via loudspeakers: the source selected in the rear is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. Audio or video sour ces cannot be selected via the iDrive in the front.
Switching off the rear DVD Rear entertainment is switched off. To switch rear entertainment back on: select
a different priority via the iDrive in the front and switch on the system, refer to page 201.
Seite 204
204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re ar
e nt
er ta
in m
en t
Headphones, vehicle loudspeakers Connecting the headphones
Normal headphones Connect via the jack 1/8"/3.5 mm, refer to page 201, on the rear CD/DVD player.
Infrared headphones Connection via the infrared interface on the lower edge of the screen. Fitting infrared headphones and information on which headphones are supported can be ob tained from your service center. When using infrared headphones, ensure that the connection between the headphones and the infrared interface is not disrupted: Do not place an obstacle between the inter
face and headphones. Do not cover the interface. Do not scratch the interface. Fold up display screens for interference-free re ception. Unfavorable light conditions such as bright am bient light can impair reception.
Sound output on the headphones or vehicle loudspeakers Operation is only possible in the rear.
1. Open "Options". 2. "Headphones" or "Loudspeakers" With the following setting, sound output in the rear is not possible via the vehicle speakers: "Driver control".
External devices General information External audio and video devices and digital cameras can be connected to cinch sockets, re fer to page 201, on the CD/DVD player. Opera tion takes place on the external device.
Due to the large number of different audio and video devices available on the market, it cannot be ensured that every audio and video device will be displayed correctly on the screen.
Connecting an external device 1. Fold down the cover in front of the cinch
sockets on the CD/DVD player. 2. Connect the external device to the RCA
sockets. Video: yellow socket. Audio: white and red socket.
Starting playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol.
Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device. If this volume differs mark edly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume The volume can only be adjusted if no external video device is connected.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller.
Seite 205
205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
What to do if... Only a black screen is visible. Switch on the system. There are no options available on the screen. Replace remote control batteries. With Professional rear seat entertainment
toggle between screens if necessary. Radio stations or TV channels are grayed out and cannot be selected. Function is limited due to the selected pri
ority. Change priority. The DVD does not play. Playback does not begin automatically.
Start DVD manually, refer to page 183. The volume of the rear vehicle speakers cannot be adjusted. Sound in the rear is output via the head
phones. Change priority if necessary and output sound via vehicle speakers.
Seite 206
206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re ar
e nt
er ta
in m
en t
Seite 207
207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Communication All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Telephone* At a glance The concept Mobile phones or other external devices such as audio players can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. After these devices are paired once, they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on as soon as they are inside the ve hicle and can be operated via iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel, and via voice activation*. Depending on their functionality, external devi ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone or as an audio source. The telephone functions are described in the following. Operating the audio functions, refer to page 196. Up to four external devices can be paired. Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider.
Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not ob serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve hicle occupants and other road users.
Snap-in adapter* The snap-in adapter is used to: Hold the mobile phone. Recharge the battery. Connect the mobile phone to an outside an
tenna of the vehicle. This provides for better network reception and consistent sound quality.
Approved mobile phones Details on which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup ported by the mobile phone preparation pack
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue tooth.
Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mo bile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation package. The software version of the mobile phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth info" 4. "Display system information" These approved mobile phones with a certain software version, support the vehicle functions described below. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions. Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as this may lead to a malfunction. A software update can be performed if neces sary.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile phone General information The following functions are available: Use of a mobile phone as a telephone. Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele
phone. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. Use of an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 196.
Requirements The mobile phone is suitable.
Seite 210
210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Te le
ph on
e
The mobile phone is ready for operation. Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone. Bluetooth presettings may need to be made
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection without confirmation or visibility, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.
Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary. A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
The ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth"
Additional functions
General information Activate the functions before pairing to be able to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit able mobile phones, refer to page 210, that sup port these functions.
Additional telephone A mobile phone can be used as an additional telephone. The additional telephone can be used to accept incoming calls, refer to page 214. While a call is active on the additional telephone, incoming calls are displayed on the Control Display.
Audio source A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
Activating/deactivating the additional functions 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"
3. Open "Options". 4. Select the desired additional function.
"Additional telephone" "Office" "Bluetooth audio"
Pairing and connecting a device Pairing a device To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi cle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.
Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Con trol Display.
1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions: for instance, search for or con nect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display. Prompt via iDrive or the mobile phone to en ter the same Bluetooth passkey.
6. Enter the passkey and confirm.
7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
Seite 211
211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. The functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols when paired. White symbol: the function is active. Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Symbol Function
Telephone.
Additional telephone.
Audio source.
Four devices can be paired with the vehicle at once. Three devices can be connected with the vehicle at once. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer to page 212.
Following the initial pairing The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
The phone book entries of the telephone stored on the SIM card* or mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle after detection, depending on the mobile phone.
Four devices can be paired. Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se cure connection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.
Connecting a specific device If more than one device is detected by the vehi cle, the device at the top of the list is connected. A different device can be connected by select ing it.
1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Select the device that is to be connected.
The functions that were assigned to the device before unpairing are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. If the device is already connected, these functions are deactivated.
Configuring the devices Additional functions can be activated or deacti vated for paired and connected devices.
1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Highlight the device to be configured. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone" 6. At least one function must be selected.
"Telephone" "Additional telephone" "Audio"
7. "OK" If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appropriate for a de vice that is already connected and the device will be unpaired.
Swapping the telephone and additional telephone The function of the telephone and additional tel ephone can be swapped automatically.
1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing a device 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 210.
Seite 212
212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Te le
ph on
e
The mobile phone could not be paired or con nected. Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive.
Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con nections with other devices if necessary.
Is the audio connection activated? Deacti vate the audio connection.
Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining battery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap- in adapter* or via the charging cable.
Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi ble that only one device can be connected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and pair and connect only one device.
The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
The telephone functions are not available. Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone function deactivated? Activate the function.
Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone.
No or not all phone book entries are displayed, or they are incomplete. Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete. It is possible that only the phone book en
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card* are transmitted.
It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.
The number of phone book entries being stored is too high.
Is the data volume of the contact too large, e.g., due to stored information such as notes? Reduce the data volume of the con tact.
Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or additional telephone? The mobile phone must be connected as a telephone.
The phone connection quality is poor. The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.
Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter* or place it in the area of the center console.
Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.
Controls Adjusting the volume Turn the knob until the desired volume is se lected. The setting is stored for the remote con trol currently in use. The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the telephone and the vol ume of the called party. Depending on the mo bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad justed. The settings can only be created during a call and must be adjusted separately for each telephone. The settings are deleted when the telephone is unpaired.
1. "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or
"Loudspeak." 5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.
Seite 213
213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Incoming call
Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise, only the phone number is displayed. If more than one phone number is assigned to a contact, only the name of the contact is dis played. For calls on the additional telephone, the num ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the network. An incoming call to the additional telephone is automatically rejected if there is an active call on the other telephone.
Accepting a call
Via iDrive "Accept"
Via the button on the steering wheel Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster* "Accept"
Rejecting a call
Via iDrive "Reject"
Via the instrument cluster* "Reject"
Ending a call
Via iDrive
"End call"
Via the button on the steering wheel Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster* "End call"
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number 1. "Telephone" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the digits individually. 4. Select the symbol.
The phone number can also be entered by voice.
Calls with multiple participants
General information You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These functions
Seite 214
214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Te le
ph on
e
must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly. If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal is sounded where appropri ate.
"Accept" The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.
Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call.
1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.
"Return" The call on hold is resumed.
Switching between two calls, hold call The active call is displayed in color. The call on hold is displayed in gray.
"Swap calls" The call on hold is resumed.
Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls. 2. "Conference call" When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.
Switching the microphone to mute When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.
1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Microphone mute" A microphone that has been switched to mute is automatically reactivated: When a new connection is established. When switching between call parties.
DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac cess to network services or for controlling devi ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose.
1. "Telephone" 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number". 3. "Keypad dialing" 4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
Phone book
Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call.
1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book"
Seite 215
215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.
Calling a contact
Symbol Meaning
Contact with one stored phone num ber.
Contact with more than one stored phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone with out reception or network, or Service Request* is active.
For contacts with one stored phone number: se lect the required contact. The connection is be ing established. For contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the required contact and the phone number. The connection is being estab lished.
Editing a contact Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a contact is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Edit entry" The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone. The 20 phone numbers dialed last are displayed. The sorting order of the phone numbers depends on the particular mo bile phone.
Dialing the number via the instrument cluster This is possible when there is no active call.
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Select the desired phone number. The connection is established.
Dialing a number via iDrive 1. "Telephone" 2. "Redial" 3. Select the desired entry and the phone num
ber if necessary. The connection is established.
Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact" 4. Select "New phone number" or contact. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".
Received calls
Displaying calls The 20 calls that were last received are dis played.
1. "Telephone"
Seite 216
216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Te le
ph on
e
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list Selecting an entry. The connection is established.
Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact" 4. Select "New phone number" or contact. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".
Hands-free system
General information Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with the ignition switched on. Depending on the mobile phone, the system au tomatically switches to the hands-free system. If the system does not switch over automatically, follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.
From the hands-free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis play; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.
Voice operation* Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys tem: operation, refer to page 25. Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation system: depending on the equipment, the mo bile phone can be voice operated as described below. The list of short commands in the operating manual does not apply to this type of voice op eration.
The concept The mobile phone can be operated without
taking your hands from the steering wheel. In many cases, the entries are accompanied
by announcements or questions. ... Verbal instructions for voice operation.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Say the command.
Terminating the voice activation system
Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.
Seite 217
217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud Press the button. Help. Possible commands are announced. The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The digits can be spoken separately or combined in a sequence to accelerate the entry.
Using alternative commands The system often recognizes a number of dif ferent commands to run a function; for instance: Dial name or Name
Example: dialing a phone number
1. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Dial number The system says: Please say the number
3. E.g., 123 456 790 The system says: 123 456 790. Continue?
4. Dial The system says: Dialing number
Calling
Dialing a phone number 1. Dial number 2. Say the phone number. 3. Dial
Correcting the phone number The sequence of digits can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits. Correct number The command can be repeated as often as nec essary.
Deleting a phone number Delete All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
Redialing Redial
Voice phone book* Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book. The entries must be entered using voice activa tion and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
Saving an entry 1. Save name 2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
duration of approx. 2 seconds. 3. Say the phone number after being prompted
to do so by the system. 4. Save
Deleting an entry 1. Delete name 2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. 3. Confirm the query with Yes.
Deleting all entries 1. Delete phonebook
The dialog for deleting the phone book is opened.
2. Confirm the query with Yes. 3. Confirm the query again with Yes.
Reading and selecting entries 1. Read phonebook
The dialog for reading the phone book is opened.
2. Say Dial number when the desired entry is read.
Selecting an entry 1. Dial name 2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. 3. Confirm the query with Yes.
Seite 218
218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Te le
ph on
e
Adjusting the volume Turn the knob during an announcement. The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed. The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes Do not use the voice operation to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can un necessarily delay the establishment of a tele phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to page 264, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.
Always say commands in the language of the system. The language for the mobile phone voice operation is preset and cannot be changed in the Control Display.
Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun roof* closed to prevent noise interference.
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Snap-in adapter* Installation position In the center armrest.
Inserting the snap-in adapter 1. Press the button and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en gages.
Inserting the mobile phone 1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con nector of the mobile phone.
2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac ing up in the direction of the electrical con nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar row 2 until it engages.
Seite 219
219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
Seite 220
220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Te le
ph on
e
Office* At a glance General information Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile phone provides compatible support of these functions and the necessary Bluetooth stand ards. Information about which mobile phones support the Office functions can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number of compatible mobile phones is available for Of fice. Contents are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. The mobile phone has read-access only.
Do not use Office while driving To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu pants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traf fic and road conditions allow this.
Requirements A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile phones, data access must be confirmed on the mobile phone.
The time, time zone, and date, refer to page 81, are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone to correctly display appointments, for example.
Office is activated, refer to page 211.
Updating Data are updated every time the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated separately.
1. "Office" 2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Update data"
Cell phone data are transmitted again to the vehicle.
Office information The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are displayed.
1. "Office" 2. "Current office" 3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Contacts At a glance Contacts can be created and edited. The con tacts from the mobile phone* are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. Addresses can be adopted as destina tions for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.
Displaying contacts
General information 1. "Office"
Seite 221
221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered, refer to page 24. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone.
Dialing phone numbers* 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries. 4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation destination* 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are used, the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the vehi cle. In this case: Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"
Checking the address as a destination* An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.
2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary. If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
General information A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers, 2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter net address.
1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options".
Seite 222
222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Of fic
e
4. "New contact"
5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ ous entries: "Delete input fields"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. 8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: Enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the vehi cle can be entered. This ensures that desti nation guidance is possible for all ad dresses. If necessary, "Accept address".
9. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types Various contact types can be assigned to phone numbers and addresses.
Symbol Meaning
Home phone number.
Business phone number.
Mobile phone number.
Other phone number.
Home address.
Business address.
Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.
1. "Home" 2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting the sorting order of the names* Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name" Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting order.
Show contact pictures Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile phone must support this function.
1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Show images" Display of all contact pictures is activated or de activated.
Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported via the Personal Profile, refer to page 33. The contacts stored in the vehicle are exported, but not those from the mobile phone.
Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone* cannot be deleted.
1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Highlight the contact. 4. Open "Options".
Seite 223
223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
5. "Delete contact"or "Delete all contacts". 6. If necessary. "Yes"
Messages General information Whether or not text messages and e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed depends on whether transmission from the mobile phone to the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e- mails may not be supported by the service pro vider, or the function may need to be enabled separately. After the mobile phone is first paired, transmission may take several minutes. Mes sages are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi tional telephone are not transmitted. Display of different messages: Text messages. My Info* messages from the BMW Assist
Portal. Messages from the BMW Assist Concierge
service*. Messages from BMW Info*. E-mails from the mobile phone.
Displaying messages 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" A symbol identifies the type of message.
Symbol Message type
Text messages.
My Info
Message from the Concierge serv ice.
Message from BMW Info.
E-mail from mobile phone.
Filtering the message list The message list can be filtered, when more than one type of message exists.
1. "Filter:"
2. Select the type of message. "All"
All messages are displayed. "E-mail"
Only e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed.
"Service message" Only messages from the BMW Assist Concierge service, My Info and BMW Info are displayed.
"Text message" Only text messages from the mobile phone are displayed.
Deleting messages Messages from the Concierge service, My Info, and BMW Info can be deleted. Delete a message:
1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired message. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete message" Delete all messages:
1. "Office" 2. "Messages"
Seite 224
224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Of fic
e
3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service
messages"
Text messages
Calling the sender of a text message 1. Select the desired message. 2. Select the symbol.
Saving the sender in the contacts 1. Highlight the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Reading the text message out loud* Read the text messages out loud, refer to page 228.
My Info
Starting destination guidance 1. Select the message. 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Dialing the number in the message Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with a message.
1. Select the desired message. 2. "Call":
If the message contains a number, the con nection is established.
"Select phone number": If the message contains more than one num ber, select the desired number from the list. The connection is established.
Message from the Concierge service
Starting destination guidance 1. Select the desired message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
Dialing the number in the message Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with a message.
1. Select the desired message. 2. "Call":
If the message contains a number, the con nection is established.
"Select phone number": If the message contains more than one num ber, select the desired number from the list. The connection is established.
Storing an address 1. Select the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Displaying additional information 1. Select the desired message. 2. "Further information"
BMW Info
Starting destination guidance 1. Select the desired message. 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Dialing the number in the message Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with a message.
Seite 225
225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
1. Select the desired message. 2. "Call":
If the message contains a number, the con nection is established.
"Select phone number": If the message contains more than one num ber, select the desired number from the list. The connection is established.
E-mail*
Displaying e-mails 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired e-mail.
Displaying e-mail contacts If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans mitted by the mobile phone, this information is displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient" If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con tact to display details. If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Using contact data Contact data from appointments, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected*, refer to page 228.
Deactivating the full display When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e- mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may result in charges.
1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of the email from the cell phone is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading the e-mail out loud* Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 228.
Calendar Display the calendar Appointments during the last 20 and the next 50 days can be displayed.
1. "Office" 2. "Calendar"
The appointments on the current day are displayed.
Selecting the calendar day 1. Select the date.
2. Select the desired day or date. "Next day" "Date:" "Previous day" "Today"
Display the appointment 1. Select the desired appointment. 2. Scroll through the appointment if neces
sary: Turn the controller. Select the symbol.
Using contact data Contact data from appointments, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected*, refer to page 228.
Seite 226
226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Of fic
e
Reading the appointment out loud* Read the appointment out loud, refer to page 228.
Tasks Displaying the task list Display tasks that are due within the next 90 days.
1. "Office" 2. "Tasks"
Sorting the task list 1. Select the header in the task list.
2. Select the sorting criterion: "Priority (!)"* "Subject" "Due date"
Displaying the task 1. Select the desired task. 2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
Turn the controller. Select the symbol.
Using contact data Contact data from appointments, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected*, refer to page 228.
Reading the task out loud* Read the task out loud, refer to page 228.
Notes Displaying notes 1. "Office" 2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying the note 1. Select the desired note.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary: Turn the controller. Select the symbol.
Using contact data Contact data from appointments, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected*, refer to page 228.
Reading the note out loud* Read the note out loud, refer to page 228.
Reminders Displaying reminders Reminders of pending appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment or after a task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.
1. "Office" 2. "Reminders" 3. Select the desired reminder. The corresponding appointment or the task are displayed.
Seite 227
227 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Using contact data At a glance Contact data from calendar entries, appoint ments, tasks, emails and notes can be stored or selected*.
Displaying contact or selecting phone number 1. "Use contact data" 2. Display the contact or select the phone
number: Select the contact to display contact de
tails. Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
Storing contact data 1. "Use contact data" 2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad
dress. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading out loud* Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
1. Select the desired message, appointment, task, or note.
2. Select the symbol. The following options are available during read ing: "Pause"
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart reading.
"Back to beginning" Start reading message again from the be ginning.
Select the symbol. Skip a paragraph.
Select the symbol. Go back one paragraph.
To end reading, tilt the controller to the left.
What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 210. Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis played. The mobile phone is not capable of the
missing function or is not connected cor rectly.
The Office function is deactivated. The mobile phone is connected as an addi
tional phone. Appointments are older than 20 days or are
more than 50 days in the future. The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than 90 days in the future.
Depending on the number of stored ap pointments, task notes, and messages in the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile phone are displayed at the right time? The time zone, time or date is incorrectly set
on the Control Display and mobile phone. The e-mail attachment is not displayed. E-mails are transmitted without an attach
ment. Entries are not displayed in full length. Text were already transmitted from the mo
bile phone in a shortened form. Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle may take several minutes. The contact pictures are not being displayed? A max. of 200 contact pictures can be stored
in the vehicle. The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
Seite 228
228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Of fic
e
Check the e-mail settings on the telephone and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.
Seite 229
229 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Contacts* General information Contacts can be created and edited and the ad dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav igation.
New contact 1. "Contacts" 2. "New contact"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ ous entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.
5. Enter the text, refer to page 24. 6. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: Enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the vehi cle can be entered. This ensures that desti nation guidance is possible for all ad dresses.
7. If necessary, "Store". 8. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.
1. "Home" 2. Create a contact. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts General information List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.
Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts" 2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered, refer to page 24. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:
Symbol Storage location
No sym bol
In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination*.
Seite 230
230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Co nt
ac ts
Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries. 4. Move the controller to the left. 5. "Yes"
Selecting the contact as a navigation destination* 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address. 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination* An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.
2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "My contacts" 2. Highlight the contact. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported via the Personal Profile, refer to page 33.
Deleting contacts 1. "My contacts" 2. Highlight the contact. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
Seite 231
231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
BMW ConnectedDrive BMW Assist* General information BMW Assist provides you with certain services, e.g., transmission of the position data of your vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if an Emergency Request* has been initiated. Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi vidually agreed upon contract. After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without your having to visit a service center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract.
Requirements The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in to a wireless communications network. This network must be capable of transmit ting the services.
To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position.
The BMW Assist service contract was signed with your service center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling must have been completed.
BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As sist Response Center is established. The BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.
Automatic Collision Notification: under cer tain conditions, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW As
sist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.
Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down. If possible, the vehicle and position data are transmitted in the process.
Customer Relations: connection with Cus tomer Relations for information on all as pects of your vehicle.
TeleService: data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmit ted to your service center, either automati cally before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.
Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex ample, the remote control is not available and the vehicle needs to be opened.
Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the BMW Assist Response Center can deter mine its position.
In addition to these services, the optional Convenience Plan offers Concierge service and information for route planning, traffic, and weather. A limited number of calls can be made via the BMW Assist Response Center with Critical Calling if, for example, the mobile phone is not available or dis charged. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center.
BMW TeleService* General information TeleService supports communication with your service center. Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center. In this way, the service center can plan its work
Seite 232
232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
BM W
C on
ne ct
ed Dr
ive
in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment.
In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve hicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance.
The service varies by country. Connection costs may ensue. Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements BMW Assist is activated. Wireless reception is available. The engine is running.
Use of BMW TeleService* The TeleServices are typically activated in the vehicle. Even TeleService Customer Service is not ac tive, a voice contact to Roadside Assistance is still possible. To continue using or to deactivate the services, please contact your service partner or the BMW customer hotline.
Concierge service* General information The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con cierge service. The Concierge service is part of the optional BMW Convenience Plan.
Starting the Concierge service 1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service" A voice connection is established with the BMW Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance At a glance BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down. Roadside Assistance* can also be contacted via a Check Control message, refer to page 84.
Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicles not equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con nection is established to Roadside Assis tance.
Seite 233
233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance" 3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis* TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are transmitted automatically. After the data are transmitted, the voice con nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab lished.
TeleService Help* TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire less transmission. TeleService Help can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and the termination of the voice connection.
Starting TeleService Help 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. The engine is running. 4. "TeleService Help" After completion of TeleService Help, a voice connection is established to Roadside Assis tance.
BMW Online* At a glance A business search can be opened via BMW On line. License conditions This product contains NetFront Browser soft ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun tries. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan. The date setting, refer to page 81, on the
Control Display is current. The vehicle is located within wireless net
work coverage.
Starting BMW Online 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Online"
3. If necessary, "OK". The BMW Online home page is displayed.
Operating BMW Online To start a search: Turn the controller to highlight an element. Press the controller to display an element.
Seite 234
234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
BM W
C on
ne ct
ed Dr
ive
Opening the start page 1. Open "Options". 2. "Display start page"
Loading a new page 1. Open "Options". 2. "Reload"
Cancel 1. Open "Options". 2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations At a glance Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicles not equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" The Customer Relations phone number is dis played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con nection is established to Customer Relations.
Vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" 3. "Start service"
Service Request* At a glance Sends information to your service partner to re quest the arrangement of a service appoint ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur ing a Service Request. If possible, your service partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Request" 3. "Start service"
A Service Request can be started via a Check Control message, refer to page 84.
Seite 235
235 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Automatic Service Request* The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your service partner prior to the service deadline. If possible, the service partner will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged. To check when your service partner was noti fied:
1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"
Services status* General information Check services status.
Displaying available services Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Status"
3. "Available services"
Updating BMW Assist Manual update of TeleService* and BMW As sist*. "Update BMW Assist"
Data transfer* During the updating of BMW services, display the status of the data transfer.
1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Data transfer"
Apps* At a glance Certain software applications of a suitable cell phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on the Con trol Display. They are operated via iDrive.
Requirements The mobile phone is suitable. The cell phone operating system supports
the software applications of Apps. Software applications are installed on the
cell phone and ready to use. Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Any additionally incurred costs are not a part of Apps.
Seite 236
236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
BM W
C on
ne ct
ed Dr
ive
Use only BMW approved software applica tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc tions.
Information about suitable cell phones, available software applications and their installation can be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at the service center.
Create the entries. Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu pants and other road users may be put in danger because of the distraction from driving. For reasons of safety, some software applica tions are usable only while the vehicle is station ary.
Operate Apps 1. Connect the cell phone via the snap-in
adapter or via the USB audio interface. 2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status Information about the currently available soft ware applications can be displayed.
1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW apps"
PlugIn* Selected functions of the cell phone are dis played on the Control Display. They can be op erated via iDrive.
1. Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter. 2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. "PlugIn" 4. "Activate PlugIn" 5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the
controller and select, for example, a desired category or track.
Press button to switch within the cell phone functions to a higher level or back.
Press button twice to switch back to the main menu.
Notes The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on
the Control Display depend on the range of installed software applications on the cell phone.
The data transmission of the software ap plications from the cell phone to the vehicle can last some time. Some software applica tions depend on the speed of the available Internet connection of the cell phone.
Some cell phones cannot simultaneously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-free sys tem. If necessary, restart the software application on the cell phone after a phone conversa tion.
TeleService Report* Transmits technical data that is evaluated for the ongoing development of BMW products from your vehicle to BMW in regular intervals if nec essary. TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that meet certain technical requirements and have a valid Assist contract; this feature is free of charge. Neither personal data nor position data is trans mitted. Indicate when the last Teleservice Report was transmitted:
1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Teleservice Info"
Seite 237
237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Mobility To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this
chapter supplies you with important information on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and
tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Refueling Fuel cap Opening 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.
Closing 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex ample. 1. Open the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.
Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Seite 240
240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re fu
el in
g
Fuel tank capacity Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters.
Refuel promptly Refuel below a range of 30 miles/50 km;
otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage may occur.
Seite 241
241 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Fuel Fuel quality
Refuel with unleaded fuel only Do not use leaded fuel as this would per
manently damage the catalytic converter.
Do not refuel with ethanol Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply sys tem.
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 or AKI 89 BMW recommends AKI 91 or 89.
Gasoline with lower AKI The minimum AKI Rating is 89. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini
mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, engine damage may occur.
Use high-quality brands Field experience has indicated significant differ ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygen by weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.
Minimum fuel grade The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
driveability, starting and stalling problems es pecially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high al titude. Should you encounter driveability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in unscheduled maintenance.
Seite 242
242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Fu el
Wheels and tires Tire inflation pressure Safety information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres sure influence the following: The service life of the tires. Road safety. Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this precaution, you may be driving on tires with in correct tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein itialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 243, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle. Vehicle load. Maximum allowable driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 243, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.
Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h
535i, 550i
Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/ PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 Y 245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Seite 243
243 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI
245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.2 / 32 -
- 2.4 / 35
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL R.: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.4 / 35 -
- 2.6 / 38
F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL R.: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.6 / 38 -
- 3.0 / 44
550i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/ PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 Y 245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.4 / 35 -
- 2.4 / 35
Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL R.: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.6 / 38 -
- 2.6 / 38
F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL R.: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.8 / 41 -
- 3.0 / 44
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h
535i, 550i Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/ PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 Y 245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S
2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Seite 244
244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
W he
el s a
nd ti
re s
Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.3 / 33 -
- 2.5 / 36
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL R.: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.5 / 36 -
- 2.8 / 41
F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL R.: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.9 /42 -
- 3.2 / 46
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/ PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 Y 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S
2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.4 / 35 -
- 2.6 / 38
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL R.: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.6 / 38 -
- 2.8 / 41
F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL R.: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.9 /42 -
- 3.3 / 48
550i xDrive Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/ PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 Y 245/50 R 18 100 V M +S A/S 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S
2.3 / 36 2.7 / 39
245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL
2.5 / 36 2.9 /42
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.4 / 35 -
- 2.4 / 35
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL R.: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.6 / 38 -
- 2.6 / 38
F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL R.: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.8 / 41 -
- 3.0 / 44
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/ PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 Y 245/50 R 18 100 H M +S
2.5 / 36 2.8 / 41
Seite 245
245 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI
245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL A/S 245/45 R 19 102 V M +S XL
2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.5 / 36 -
- 2.5 / 36
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL R.: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.8 / 41 -
- 2.8 / 41
F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL R.: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
3.0 / 44 -
- 3.2 / 46
Tire identification marks Tire size 255/50 R 19 103 Y 255: nominal width in mm 50: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 19: rim diameter in inches 103: load rating, not for ZR tires Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3510 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design
3510: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age DOT 3510: the tire was manufactured in the 35th week in 2010.
Recommendation Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and cli mate.
Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Seite 246
246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
W he
el s a
nd ti
re s
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfa ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and pos sible tire failure. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
RSC Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 249, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects: Unusual vibrations during driving. Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Seite 247
247 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re
duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re sult.
Changing wheels and tires Mounting
Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.
Wheel and tire combination Information on the correct wheel-tire combina tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob tained from your service center. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse, use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom
mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they are mounted.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.
New tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe riod. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/ 300 km.
Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Seite 248
248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
W he
el s a
nd ti
re s
Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de
sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.
Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 /+7 . Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro vide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of perform ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe cialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci dents can occur.
Run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles. This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires* Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall. The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de gree. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re main drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire., refer to page 94
Changing run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle, classified as road-safe and recommended. Consult your service center for more informa tion.
Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: 245/50 R 18. 245/45 R 19. Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Seite 249
249 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Snow chain detection*
The concept When using snow chains, you should set whether you are driving with or without snow chains via the iDrive. The snow chain detection system supports you by automatically showing the detected state on the Control Display. When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer ing of the Integral Active Steering* is deacti vated automatically. At speeds above the maximum allowable speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again automatically.
Activating the status 1. "Settings" 2. "Tire chains" 3. "Tire chains installed"
Automatic detection If functioning properly: Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated . After you drive a short distance, a Check Control message is shown and the state is activated automatically. Confirm the automatic activation.
Snow chains are not mounted. The setting is activated .
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check Control message is displayed. Deactivate the status manually.
If not functioning properly: Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated . A Check Control message is not displayed. The automatic detection system is malfunc tioning. Activate the status manually.
Activating/deactivating rear axle steering If the status indicating that snow chains are in use is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti vated automatically. At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again, even though snow chains are in use.
Seite 250
250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
W he
el s a
nd ti
re s
Engine compartment Important features in the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number* 2 Jump starting, negative terminal 3 Washer fluid reservoir
4 Jump starting, positive terminal 5 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir
Hood Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.
Never reach into the engine compartment Never reach into the intermediate spaces
or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is risk of injury, e.g. from rotating or hot parts.
1. Pull the lever.
Seite 251
251 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
2. Press the release handle and open the hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Danger of injury when the hood is open There is a danger of injury from protruding
parts when the hood is open.
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over imme diately and close it securely.
Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Seite 252
252 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
En gi
ne co
m pa
rtm en
t
Engine oil General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions. Therefore, check the engine oil level after every refueling using the electronic engine oil level check.
Checking the oil level The concept The oil level is monitored electronically and dis played on the Control Display.
Requirements The engine must be running and warm after
the vehicle has been driven for at least 6 miles/10 km.
The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a level roadway.
Displaying the oil level 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages "Engine oil level OK" "Measurement not possible at this time." "Measuring engine oil level..."
Duration with the engine running: ap prox. 3 minutes.
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes. "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!" Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.
"Engine oil level too high! Have this checked." Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immedi
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en gine damage.
"Measurement inactive. Have this checked." Note the newly calculated remaining mile age until the next oil service. Have the sys tem checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil Filler neck
When the indicator lights up in the instrument cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.
Recommended oil types, refer to page 254. Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil
dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.
Seite 253
253 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Oil types Note
No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine damage.
Approved oil types Your service center can advise you on which en gine oils have been approved by the manufac turer of your vehicle. The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Only use approved BMW High Performance oil. Approved oils belong to the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE 5W-30.
Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of another oil with the follow ing specification may be used. API SM quality standards or higher.
Coolant General information
Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.
Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en
gine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.
Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suit able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for suitable additives.
Coolant level If there is no Min and Max mark in the filler neck of the coolant reservoir, have the coolant level checked if necessary by your service cen ter and add coolant as needed.
Checking 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres sure to dissipate, and then open it.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
Seite 254
254 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
En gi
ne o
il
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 255
255 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Maintenance BMW Maintenance System The maintenance system directs you to re quired maintenance measures and thereby sup ports you in maintaining road safety and the op erational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service deter mines the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile. Details on the service requirements, refer to page 82, can be displayed on the Control Dis play.
Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is con tinuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your ve hicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re mote control that you used most recently.
Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti vated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have regular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en tries are proof of regular maintenance.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle emissions.
Emissions The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos sible.
The warning lamp flashes under cer tain circumstances:
Seite 256
256 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
M ai
nt en
an ce
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control compo nents, in particular the catalytic con verter.
Fuel cap The indicator lamp lights up. If the fuel cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened, the display should go out in a short time.
Data memory Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op eration, faults and user settings. These data are stored in the remote control and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the ve hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way provide valuable information for service proc esses and repair or for optimizing and develop ing vehicle functions further. In addition, if you signed a service contract for Assist, certain vehicle data can be sent directly from the vehicle to facilitate the desired serv ices.
Seite 257
257 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Replacing components Tool kit
The tool kit is located in the rear compartment in the cargo area, refer to page 142.
Wiper blade replacement Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the wind shield.
Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to
page 73, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
Lamp and bulb replacement General information Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to your service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your service center.
Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system, you
should always switch off the lights affected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.
Seite 258
258 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re pl
ac in
g co
m po
ne nt
s
Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover serve as the light source for controls, display el ements and other equipment. These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never stare
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other wise, irritation of the retina could result.
Headlamp glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When the light is switched on, the condensation evapo rates after a short time. The headlamp glasses do not need to be changed. If there is a large amount of moisture, e.g., water droplets form in the lamp, have it checked by your service center.
Front lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Adaptive light control 2 Parking lamp, daytime running lights*
3 Low beams/high beams 4 Turn signal
Xenon lamps* Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car ried out improperly.
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.
Turn signals, incl. side indicators Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 258. These lamps are made using LED technology. Please contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
Adaptive light control Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 258. The illustration shows the left side of the engine compartment. 55-watt bulb, H3.
Seite 259
259 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
1. Open the folding cover in the engine com partment.
2. Turn the cap and remove it.
3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb and replace it. 5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Parking lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 258. These lamps are made using LED technology. Please contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
Front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 258. 35-watt bulb, H8.
1. Carefully pull out the grill toward the front.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Pull the lamp out toward the front. 4. Remove the bulb and replace it. 5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Turn signal 2 Tail lamp
Seite 260
260 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re pl
ac in
g co
m po
ne nt
s
3 Inside brake lamp* 4 Backup lamp 5 Outside brake lamp
Turn signal, brake, tail, and license plate lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs., refer to page 258 These lights are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
Lamps in the tailgate Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs., refer to page 258
Access to the lamps 1. Remove the four screws using the screw
driver from the tool kit.
2. Pull down the cover with a firm tug.
3. Pull off the connector toward the left.
4. Replace the bulb.
Inside brake lamp* To change the brake lamp, contact your service center.
Backup lamp 16-watt bulb, W16W.
Turn the bulb, pull it out, and replace it.
Changing wheels Notes The vehicle equipment does not include a spare tire.
Seite 261
261 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
When using run-flat tires* or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated in the positions shown.
Lug bolt lock*
The lug bolt lock is in the tool kit or in a storage compartment close to the tool kit.
Lug bolt, arrow 1. Adapter, arrow 2.
Removing 1. Attach the adapter to the wheel lug. 2. Unscrew the lug bolt. Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt back on.
Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only. Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble.
After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available.
Charging the battery In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the terminals, refer to page 266, in the engine com partment with the engine off.
Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again. Time: update. Date: update. Radio station: save again. Navigation system: wait for the operability of
the navigation.
Seite 262
262 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re pl
ac in
g co
m po
ne nt
s
Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses Notes
Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the cargo area.
In the glove compartment
Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid, arrow 2.
In the cargo area
Open the cover on the right side trim.
Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.
Seite 263
263 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Breakdown assistance Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Emergency Request* Requirements Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone. An Emergency Request can be made, even if no mobile phones are paired with the ve hicle.
BMW Assist is activated. The radio ready state is switched on. The BMW Assist system is logged in to a
wireless communications network sup ported by BMW Assist.
The Assist system is functional. Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency Re
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.
Service contract After your contract with BMW Assist has ex
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac tivated by the service center without you having to visit a workshop. After deactivation, an Emergency Request is no longer possible.
Under certain circumstances, the system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up. The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab lished.
The LED flashes if the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been es tablished. After the Emergency Request arrives at the BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstan ces. For this purpose, data that are used to de termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard on the hands-free system, the hands-free system may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW
Seite 264
264 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Br ea
kd ow
n as
si st
an ce
Assist Response Center may still be able to hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re quest is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located on the left in the cargo area. Release the Velcro fastener to remove it.
First aid kit*
The first aid kit is located in a storage compart ment on the right side in the cargo area. To remove it, raise the cover by the corner, see arrow.
Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents reg ularly and replace any items promptly.
Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain assis tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.
Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 233 phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance* can be es tablished directly.
Jump starting Notes If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce dure.
Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo nents while the engine is running.
Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa tion can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other wise, there is the danger of short circuits.
Seite 265
265 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive ter minal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the negative terminal.
Connecting the cables 1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter
minal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of the vehicle providing assis tance.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre sponding engine or body ground of the ve hicle to be started.
Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed. If the vehicle being started has a diesel en gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged bat tery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing Transporting your vehicle
Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a loading
platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.
Seite 266
266 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Br ea
kd ow
n as
si st
an ce
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.
Tow-starting
Note Do not tow-start the vehicle. Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem edied.
Towing other vehicles
General information Light towing vehicle Your vehicle must not be lighter than the
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control vehicle response.
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.
Switch on the hazard warning system, de pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow.
Towing methods when towing other vehicles
Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Maneuvering capability is limited during cor
nering. The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se cured on other parts of the vehicle.
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is located in the tool kit under the cargo area floor.
Tow fitting, information on use Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
Seite 267
267 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only.
Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve hicle can occur.
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.
Seite 268
268 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Br ea
kd ow
n as
si st
an ce
Care Car washes Notes
Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 / 60 . Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause dam age or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the operating instructions for the high- pressure washer.
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Park Distance Control*, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/ 30 cm.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve hicle.
Washing in automatic car washes Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car washes right from the start. Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
Notes Note the following: Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms. Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.
Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 72, to avoid unintentional wiper activation.
In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system*. Follow the instructions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 45.
Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.
Before driving into a car wash The vehicle is able to roll when the following steps are taken:
1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Engage transmission position N. 3. Release the parking brake, refer to page 67,
or deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to page 69.
4. Switch the engine off. Transmission position P with the igni tion off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an auto matic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.
Transmission position Transmission position P is engaged automati cally: When the ignition is switched off. After approx. 15 minutes.
Seite 269
269 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Headlamps Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur.
Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dan gerous and harmful to your health.
Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences can act on the vehicle paint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car care to these influences.
Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. Suitable care products are available from the service center.
Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma terial vigorously.
Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets above 140 /60 ; follow the manufacturer's instructions.
Chrome surfaces* Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, particu larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans ers.
Seite 270
270 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ca re
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil icon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts* Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.
Plastic components These include: Imitation leather surfaces. Headliner. Lamp lenses. Instrument cluster cover. Matte black spray-coated components. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Moisten the cloth lightly and use plastic cleanser, if necessary. Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.
Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.
Floor carpets and floor mats* No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, for example.
Floor mats can be removed from the passenger compartment for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth mois tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens Clean the displays with a microfiber cloth.
Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household cleans
ers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components. Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.
Long-term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.
Seite 271
271 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Reference This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Technical data Dimensions Width with mirrors, height with roof-mounted aerial
Width without mirrors
Seite 274
274 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a
Length, wheel base
Smallest turning circle : 40 ft/12.2 m xDrive : 41 ft/12.5 m
Weights
535i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,754/2,610
Load lbs/kg 1,014/460
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,667/1,210
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,306/1,500
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700
550i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,952/2,700
Load lbs/kg 970/440
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,843/1,290
Seite 275
275 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
550i
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,306/1,500
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700
535i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,897/2,675
Load lbs/kg 1,014/460
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,777/1,260
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,306/1,500
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700
550i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,095/2,765
Load lbs/kg 970/440
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,976/1,350
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,306/1,500
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer to page 242
Windshield and headlamp washer system
US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0
Seite 276
276 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Te ch
ni ca
l d at
a
Short commands of the voice activation system* General information Instructions for voice activation system, refer to page 25.
To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands
Adjusting Vehicle
Function Command
Open the main menu. Main menu
Open the options. Options
Open the settings. Settings
Info display of the instrument cluster. Info Display
Settings on the Control Display. Control display
Open the time and date. Time and date
Open the language and units. Language and units
Open the speed limit. Speed
Open the light. Lighting
Open the door lock. Door locks
Open the profiles. Profiles
Equipment*
Function Command
Open the air conditioning settings. Climate
Open the Head-up Display. head up display
Enable the rear. Allow rear control
Seite 277
277 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Vehicle information Owner's Manual
Function Command
Open the Owner's Manual. Display Owner's Manual
Open the Quick Reference Guide. Quick reference
Open the index. Owner's Manual
Open the search by pictures. Search by pictures
Computer
Function Command
Open the computer. Onboard info
Open the trip computer. Trip computer
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. Vehicle info
Open the vehicle status. Vehicle status
Navigation* General information
Function Command
Navigation menu. Navigation
Open the destination entry. Enter address
Enter the address. Enter address
Open destination guidance. Guidance
Start destination guidance. Start guidance
Terminate destination guidance. Stop guidance
Open the home address. Home address
Open the route criteria. Route preference
Seite 278
278 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Sh or
t c om
m an
ds o
f t he
vo ic
e ac
tiv at
io n
sy st
em
Function Command
Open the route. Route information
Switch on the spoken instruction. Switch on voice instructions
Repeat the spoken instruction. Repeat voice instructions
Switch off the spoken instruction. Switch off voice instructions
Display the address book. Address book
Display the most recent destinations. Last destinations
Open the traffic bulletins. Traffic Info
Special destinations. Points of interest
Map
Function Command
Display the map. Map
Map facing north. Map facing north
Map facing the direction of travel. Map in direction of travel
Perspective map. Map perspective view
Automatic scaling of the map. Map with automatic scaling
Scale...feet. Map scale ... feet
Scale...meters. Map scale ... meters e.g., map scale 100 meters
Scale...kilometers. Map scale ... kilometers e.g., map scale 5 kilo meters
Scale...miles. Map scale ... miles e.g., map scale 5 miles
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen. Switch on splitscreen
Switch off the split screen. Turn off split screen
Adjust the split screen. Split screen content
Split screen, map facing north. Split screen map facing north
Split screen, current position. Split screen current position
Seite 279
279 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Function Command
Split screen, facing the direction of travel. Split screen map in direction of travel
Split screen, perspective. Split screen perspective
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. Splitscreen Exit ramp view
Split screen scale...feet. Split screen scale ... feet e.g., split screen scale 100 feet
Split screen scale...meters. Split screen scale ... meters e.g., split screen scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers. Split screen scale ... kilometers e.g., split screen scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles. Split screen scale ... miles e.g., split screen scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. Split screen, Traffic conditions
Split screen, computer. Split screen on board info
Split screen, trip computer. Splitscreen trip computer
Split screen, scale automatically. Split screen automatic scaling
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. Enter address
Trip list. Stored trips
Radio FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. Frequency ... megahertz e.g., 93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. Radio
Open the FM stations. F M
Open the manual search. Manual
Seite 280
280 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Sh or
t c om
m an
ds o
f t he
vo ic
e ac
tiv at
io n
sy st
em
Function Command
Select a frequency range. Select frequency
Open a station. Select station
AM
Function Command
Open a frequency. Frequency ... Kilohertz e.g., frequency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. A M
Open the manual search. Manual
Weather Band
Function Command
Open the Weather Band. Weather band
Switch on the Weather Band. Weather band on
Select a Weather Band station. Select a weather channel
Satellite radio*
Function Command
Open the satellite radio. Satellite radio
Switch on the satellite radio. Satellite radio on
Select a satellite radio channel. Select satellite radio e.g., satellite radio channel 2
Stored stations
Function Command
Open the stored stations. Presets
Choose a stored station. Select preset
Select a stored station. Preset ... e.g., stored station 2
Seite 281
281 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
CD/Multimedia* CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Select a track. Track ... e.g., track 5 or C D track ... e.g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. C D on
Select a CD. Select C D
Select a CD and track. C D ... track ... e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu. C D and multimedia
CD and DVD. C D
Select a DVD. D V D ... e.g. DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split screen.
Entertainment details
Music collection
Function Command
Search for music, open a menu. Music search
Open the current playback. Current playback
Open the music collection. Music collection
Play back the music collection. Music collection on
Play back the most frequently played tracks. Top fifty
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. External devices
Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth
AUX at front. AUX front
Seite 282
282 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Sh or
t c om
m an
ds o
f t he
vo ic
e ac
tiv at
io n
sy st
em
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. Tone
Telephone*
Function Command
Dial a phone number. Dial number
Open the Telephone menu. Telephone
Display the phone book. Phonebook
Redialing. Redial
Display received calls. Received calls
List of messages Messages
Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth
Office*
Function Command
Open the Office menu. Office
Display Office Today. Current office
Display the contacts. Contacts
Display the messages. Messages
Display the calendar. Calendar
Display the tasks. Tasks
Display the reminders. Reminders
Seite 283
283 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Contacts*
Function Command
Select a name. Choose name
My contacts. My contacts
Open the contacts. Contacts
New contact. New contact
BMW ConnectedDrive*
Function Command
Open BMW ConnectedDrive. Connected Drive
Open BMW Search. B M W Online
Seite 284
284 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Sh or
t c om
m an
ds o
f t he
vo ic
e ac
tiv at
io n
sy st
em
Seite 285
285 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys
tem 99 ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 106 Activated-charcoal filter 130 Active Blind Spot Detec
tion 96 Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 106 Active seat, front 52 Active seat ventilation,
front 52 Active seat ventilation,
rear 55 Active Steering, integral 102 Adaptive brake assistant 99 Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 98 Adaptive drive 101 Adaptive light control 86 Adaptive light control, bulb re
placement 259 Additional telephone 210 Additives, oil 254 Adjustments, seats/head re
straints 49 Airbags 89 Airbags, indicator/warning
light 90 Air circulation, refer to Recir
culated-air mode 128 Air distribution, manual 127 Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 129 Air pressure, tires 243 Air vents, refer to Ventila
tion 130 Air volume, automatic climate
control 128 Alarm system 44 Alarm, unintentional 45
All around the center con sole 17
All around the headliner 18 All around the steering
wheel 12 ALL program, automatic cli
mate control 129 All-season tires, refer to Win
ter tires 249 All-wheel-drive 100 Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 134 Alternative oil types 254 AM/FM station 174 Announcement, navigation,
refer to Spoken instruc tions 163
Antifreeze, washer fluid 73 Antilock Brake System,
ABS 99 Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 99 Appointments 226 Approved engine oils 254 Apps 236 Armrest, refer to Center arm
rest 140 Arrival time 80 Ashtray 135 Assist 232 Assistance, Roadside Assis
tance 265 Assistance when driving
off 99 Audio playback 181 Audio playback, Blue
tooth 196 AUTO intensity 128 Automatic car wash 269 Automatic climate con
trol 127 Automatic Cruise Control with
Stop & Go 106
Automatic Curb Monitor 60 Automatic deactivation, front
passenger airbags 90 Automatic headlamp con
trol 86 Automatic Hold 69 Automatic locking 39 Automatic recirculated-air
control 128 Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 39 Automatic Soft Closing, tail
gate 40 Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 73 Automatic trunk lid 40 AUTO program, automatic cli
mate control 128 AUTO program, intensity 128 AUX-IN port 192 Average fuel consumption 79 Average speed 79 Axle loads, weights 275
B Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 51 Backrest, seats 49 Backrest, width 51 Back seats, adjusting 53 Backup camera 119 Backup lamps, bulb replace
ment 261 Balance 172 Band-Aids, refer to First aid
kit 265 Bar for tow-starting/tow
ing 267 Basic position, rear seats 54 Bass 172
Seite 286
286 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ev er
yt hi
ng fr
om A
to Z
Battery replacement, remote control, rear entertain ment 202
Battery replacement, vehicle battery 262
Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 32
Battery, vehicle 262 Before entering the car
wash 269 Belts, safety belts 55 Beverage holder, cu
pholder 141 Blinds, sun protection 46 Bluetooth audio 196 BMW Apps 236 BMW Apps, video play
back 195 BMW Assist 232 BMW EfficientDynamics, refer
to Saving fuel 150 BMW homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW Maintenance Sys
tem 256 BMW Online 234 Bottle holder, refer to Cu
pholder 141 Brake assistant 99 Brake assistant, adaptive 99 Brake discs, breaking in 146 Brake force display 98 Brake lamps, brake force dis
play 98 Brake lamps, bulb replace
ment 261 Brake lights, adaptive 98 Brake pads, breaking in 146 Braking, notes 147 Breakdown assis
tance 264, 265 Breaking in 146 Brightness of Control Dis
play 82 Bulb replacement 258 Bulb replacement, front 259 Bulb replacement, rear 260 Bulbs and lamps 258
Button, RES 108 Button, Start/Stop 66 Bypassing, refer to starting
aid 265
C Calendar 226 California Proposition 65
Warning 7 Camera, backup camera 121 Camera, care 271 Camera, Side View 122 Camera, Top View 119 Can holder, refer to Cu
pholder 141 Car battery 262 Car care products 270 Care, displays 271 Care, vehicle 270 Cargo 148 Cargo area 136 Cargo area, enlarging 136 Cargo area lid 39 Cargo area, storage compart
ments 142 Cargo partition 138 Cargo straps, securing
cargo 149 Car key, refer to Remote con
trol 32 Carpet, care 271 Car wash 269 Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 146 CBS Condition Based Serv
ice 256 CD/DVD 181 CD/DVD player, rear 201 CDs, storing 188 Cell phone 210 Center armrest 140 Center console 17 Central locking system 35 Central screen, refer to Control
Display 19 Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7
Changing parts 258 Changing wheels/tires 248 Check Control 83 Children, seating position 62 Children, transporting
safely 62 Child restraint fixing sys
tem 62 Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 63 Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 62 Child-safety locks 65 Child seat, mounting 62 Child seats 62 Chrome parts, care 270 Cigarette lighter 135 Cleaning, displays 271 Climate control 127 Climate control wind
shield 147 Clock 78 Closing/opening from in
side 38 Closing/opening via door
lock 38 Closing/opening with remote
control 36 Clothes hooks 141 Collision warning 112 Combination instrument 14 Combination instrument, elec
tronic displays 16 Combination switch, refer to
Turn signals 71 Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 71 Comfort Access 42 COMFORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 104 Computer 78 Concierge service 233 Condensation on win
dows 128 Condensation under the vehi
cle 148 Condition Based Service
CBS 256
Seite 287
287 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Confirmation signal 37 Contacts 221, 230 Control Display 19 Control Display, settings 81 Controller 19 Control systems, driving sta
bility 99 Convenient opening 36 Coolant 254 Coolant temperature 77 Cooling function 129 Cooling, maximum 128 Cooling system 254 Corrosion on brake discs 148 Cruise control 113 Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go 106 Cruising range 76 Cupholder 141 Curb weight 275 Current fuel consumption 77 Current location, storing 156 Customer Relations 235
D Damage, tires 247 Damping control, dy
namic 101 Data, technical 274 Date 78 Daytime running lights 86 Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 128 Destination distance 79 Destination guidance 161 Destination guidance with in
termediate destinations 160 Destination input, naviga
tion 154 Digital clock 78 Digital radio 175 Dimensions 274 Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 61 Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 71
Display in front wind shield 125
Display, instrument cluster 76 Display lighting, refer to Instru
ment lighting 88 Displays 14 Displays, cleaning 271 Disposal, coolant 255 Disposal, vehicle battery 263 Distance control, refer to
PDC 115 Distance, selecting for
ACC 107 Distance to destination 79 Divided screen view, split
screen 23 Door lock, refer to Remote
control 32 Doors, Automatic Soft Clos
ing 39 Downhill control 100 Drive-off assistant 99 Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 99 Driving instructions, breaking
in 146 Driving notes, general 146 Driving stability control sys
tems 99 Driving tips 146 DSC Dynamic Stability Con
trol 99 DTC Dynamic Traction Con
trol 100 DVD/CD 181 DVD/CD notes 187 DVD/CD player, rear 201 DVD changer 185 DVD settings 184 DVDs, storing 188 DVD, video 183 Dynamic Damping Con
trol 101 Dynamic destination guid
ance 167 Dynamic Drive 101 Dynamic Driving Control 103
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 99
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 100
E EfficientDynamics, refer to
Saving fuel 150 Electronic displays, instru
ment cluster 16 Electronic engine oil level
check 253 Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 99 Emergency detection, remote
control 33 Emergency release, door
lock 38 Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 240 Emergency release, parking
brake 68 Emergency Request 264 Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 265 Emergency start function, en
gine start 33 Emergency unlocking, tail
gate 42 Energy Control 77 Energy recovery 78 Engine compartment 251 Engine compartment, working
in 251 Engine coolant 254 Engine oil 253 Engine oil, adding 253 Engine oil additives 254 Engine oil filler neck 253 Engine oil temperature 77 Engine oil types, alterna
tive 254 Engine oil types, ap
proved 254 Engine start during malfunc
tion 33
Seite 288
288 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ev er
yt hi
ng fr
om A
to Z
Engine start, refer to Starting the engine 66
Engine start, Starting aid 265 Engine stop 67 Engine temperature 77 Equalizer 172 Equipment, interior 133 ESP Electronic Stability Pro
gram, refer to DSC 99 Exchanging wheels/tires 248 Exhaust system 146 Exterior mirror, automatic dim
ming feature, dimmable exte rior mirrors 60
Exterior mirrors 59 External devices 192 External start 265 External temperature dis
play 77 External temperature warn
ing 77 Eyes for securing cargo 149
F Fader 172 Failure message, refer to
Check Control 83 False alarm, refer to Uninten
tional alarm 45 Fan, refer to Air volume 128 Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 83 Filler neck for engine oil 253 Fine wood, care 271 First aid kit 265 Fitting for towing, refer to Tow
fitting 267 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 92 Flat tire, warning lamp 93 Flat tire, wheel change 261 Flooding 147 Floor carpet, care 271 Floor mats, care 271 FM/AM station 174 Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 73
Foot brake 147 Front airbags 89 Front fog lamps 88 Front fog lamps, front, bulb re
placement 260 Front lamps 259 Front passenger airbags, au
tomatic deactivation 90 Front passenger airbags, indi
cator lamp 91 Front seats, adjusting 49 Fuel cap 240 Fuel consumption, current 77 Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump tion 79
Fuel filler flap 240 Fuel gauge 76 Fuel quality 242 Fuel, tank capacity 276 Fuse 263
G Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote control 133
Gas station recommenda tion 163
Gear change, automatic trans mission 74
General driving notes 146 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor
amic glass sunroof 47 Glove compartment 139 GPS navigation, refer to Navi
gation system 154 Gross vehicle weight, ap
proved 275 Gross weight, permissible for
trailer towing 275
H Hand brake, refer to Parking
brake 67 Hand-held transmitter, alter
nating code 134
Hazard warning flashers 264 HDC Hill Descent Control 100 HD Radio 175 Head airbags 89 Headlamp control, auto
matic 86 Headlamp courtesy delay fea
ture 85 Headlamp courtesy delay fea
ture via remote control 36 Headlamp flasher 71 Headlamp glass 259 Headlamps 259 Headlamps, care 270 Headlamp washer system 71 Headliner 18 Headphones, rear entertain
ment 205 Head restraints 49 Head restraints, front 56 Head restraints, rear 57 Head-up Display 125 Head-up Display, care 271 Heavy cargo, stowing 149 Height, seats 49 Height with roof-mounted aer
ial, vehicle 274 High-beam Assistant 87 High beams 71 High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 87 Hill Descent Control HDC 100 Hills 148 Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 99 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 141 Homepage 6 Hood 251 Horn 12 Hotel function, tailgate 42 Hot exhaust system 146 House number, entering for
navigation 155 Hydroplaning 147
Seite 289
289 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
I Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 77 Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 77 Identification marks, tires 246 Identification number, refer to
Engine compartment 251 iDrive 19 Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 32 Ignition off 66 Ignition on 66 Indication of a flat tire 93 Indicator and warning mes
sages 14 Indicator lamps 14 Individual air distribution 127 Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 33 Inflation pressure, tires 243 Info display, refer to Com
puter 78 Information on the navigation
data 168 Initialization, Integral Active
Steering 102 Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon
itor TPM 93 Instrument cluster 14, 76 Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 16 Instrument lighting 88 Integral Active Steering 102 Integrated key 32 Integrated universal remote
control 133 Intensity, AUTO program 128 Interactive map 158 Interior equipment 133 Interior lamps 88 Interior lamps via remote con
trol 36 Interior motion sensor 45 Interior rearview mirror 60 Interior rearview mirror, auto
matic dimming feature 61
Intermediate destinations 160 Internet page 6 Intersection, entering for navi
gation 155 Interval display, service re
quirements 82 iPod/iPhone 193
J Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 262 Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 262 Joystick, automatic transmis
sion 74
K Key/remote control 32 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 42 Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 33 Kickdown, automatic trans
mission 74 Knee airbag 89
L Lamp replacement 258 Lamp replacement, front 259 Lamp replacement, rear 260 Lamps 85 Lamps and bulbs 258 Lane departure warning 95 Lane margin, warning 95 Language on Control Dis
play 82 Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 149 LATCH child restraint fixing
system 63 Leather, care 270 LEDs, light-emitting di
odes 259 Length, vehicle 275 Letters and numbers, enter
ing 24
License plate lamp, bulb re placement 261
Light-alloy wheels, care 270 Light control 86 Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 259 Lighter, front 135 Lighting 85 Lighting via remote control 36 Light switch 85 Load 149 Loading 148 Loading position 138 Lock, door 38 Locking/unlocking from in
side 38 Locking/unlocking via door
lock 38 Locking/unlocking with re
mote control 36 Locking, automatic 39 Locking, central 35 Locking via tailgate 40 Lock, power window 46 Locks, doors, and win
dows 65 Low beams 85 Low beams, automatic, refer to
High-beam Assistant 87 Lower back support 51 Lug bolt lock 262 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 149 Lumbar support 51
M Maintenance 256 Maintenance require
ments 256 Maintenance, service require
ments 82 Maintenance System,
BMW 256 Malfunction displays, refer to
Check Control 83 Malfunction, self-leveling sus
pension 103
Seite 290
290 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ev er
yt hi
ng fr
om A
to Z
Manual air distribution 127 Manual air volume 128 Manual brake, refer to Parking
brake 67 Manual mode, transmis
sion 75 Manual operation, backup
camera 119 Manual operation, door
lock 38 Manual operation, exterior mir
rors 60 Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 240 Manual operation, Park Dis
tance Control PDC 116 Manual operation, parking
brake 68 Manual operation, Side
View 122 Manual operation, Top
View 118 Map, destination entry 158 Map in split screen 165 Map view 163 Marking on approved
tires 248 Marking, run-flat tires 249 Massage seat, front 52 Master key, refer to Remote
control 32 Maximum cooling 128 Maximum speed, winter
tires 249 Measure, units of 82 Medical kit 265 Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 58 Menu in instrument cluster 78 Menus, operating, iDrive 19 Menus, refer to iDrive operat
ing concept 20 Message list, traffic bulle
tins 165 Messages 224 Messages, refer to Check
Control 83 Microfilter 130
Minimum tread, tires 247 Mirror 59 Mirror memory 58 Mobile communication devi
ces in the vehicle 147 Mobile phone 210 Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7 Moisture in headlamp 259 Monitor, refer to Control Dis
play 19 Mounting of child restraint fix
ing systems 62 MP3 player 192 Multi-function hook 142 Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 12 Multimedia 181 Music collection 188 Music search 189 Music, storing 188
N Navigation 154 Navigation data 168 Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 56 Neck restraints, rear, refer to
Head restraints 57 New wheels and tires 248 Night Vision with pedestrian
detection 122 NORMAL program, Dynamic
Driving Control 104 Notes 227 Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 267
O OBD Onboard Diagnos
tics 256 Obstacle marking, backup
camera 120 Odometer 78 Office 221 Oil 253
Oil, adding 253 Oil additives 254 Oil change interval, service re
quirements 82 Oil filler neck 253 Oil level check 253 Oil types, alternative 254 Oil types, approved 254 Old batteries, disposal 263 Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 256 Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 19 Online, refer to BMW On
line 234 Opening/closing from in
side 38 Opening/closing via door
lock 38 Opening/closing with remote
control 36 Operating concept, iDrive 19 Outside air, refer to Automatic
recirculated-air control 128 Overheating of engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 77
P Paint, vehicle 270 Panic mode 36 Panoramic glass sunroof 47 Park Distance Control
PDC 115 Parked-car ventilation 132 Parked vehicle, condensa
tion 148 Parking aid, refer to PDC 115 Parking brake 67 Parking lamps 85 Parking lamps, bulb replace
ment 260 Parking with Auto Hold 69 Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 60 Pathway lines, backup cam
era 120
Seite 291
291 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
PDC Park Distance Con trol 115
Pedestrian detection, refer to Night Vision 122
People detection, refer to Night Vision 122
Permissible axle load 275 Personal information 221 Personal Profile 33 Phone 210 Pinch protection system, glass
sunroof 48 Pinch protection system, win
dows 45 Plastic, care 271 PlugIn 237 Position, storing 156 Postal code, entering in navi
gation 154 Power failure 262 Power windows 45 Pressure, tire air pres
sure 243 Profile, refer to Personal Pro
file 33 Programmable memory but
tons, iDrive 23 Protective function, glass sun
roof 48 Protective function, win
dows 45 Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 19
R Radiator fluid 254 Radio 174 Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 32 Radio ready state 66 Rain sensor 72 Random 182 Random playback 182 RDS 175 Reading out loud 228 Rear automatic climate con
trol 131
Rear axle steering 102 Rear entertainment 201 Rear lamps 260 Rear seats, adjusting 53 Rear seats, basic position 54 Rear sockets 136 Rear source, selecting for rear
entertainment 204 Rearview mirror 59 Rear window defroster 129 Recirculated-air mode 128 Recommended tire
brands 248 Refueling 240 Remaining range 76 Reminders 227 Remote control/key 32 Remote control, malfunc
tion 37 Remote control, rear enter
tainment 202 Remote control, universal 133 Replacement fuse 263 Replacing parts 258 Replacing wheels/tires 248 Reporting safety defects 8 RES button 108 Reserve warning, refer to
Range 76 Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon
itor TPM 93 Residual heat, automatic cli
mate control 129 Retaining straps, securing
cargo 149 Retreaded tires 248 Roadside Assistance 233 Roadside parking lamps 86 Roller sunblinds 46 Roll stabilization, refer to
Adaptive Drive 101 Roll stabilization, refer to Dy
namic Drive 101 Roof load capacity 275 Roof-mounted luggage
rack 149 Rope for tow-starting/tow
ing 267
Route 162 Route criteria, route 161 Route, displaying 162 Routes, avoiding 162 Route section, bypassing 163 RSC Runflat System Compo
nent, refer to Run-flat tires 249
Rubber components, care 270
Run-flat tires 249
S Safe braking 147 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder 56 Safety belts 55 Safety belts, care 271 Safety switch, windows 46 Safety systems, airbags 89 Satellite radio 176 Saving fuel 150 Scale, changing during navi
gation 164 Screen, refer to Control Dis
play 19 Screwdriver 258 Screw thread for tow fit
ting 268 Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 55 Seat heating, front 52 Seat heating, rear 54 Seating position for chil
dren 62 Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 58 Seats 49 Seats, rear, adjusting 53 Seat ventilation, front 52 Seat ventilation, rear 55 Selection list in instrument
cluster 78 Selector lever, automatic
transmission 74 Self-leveling suspension, air
suspension 102
Seite 292
292 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ev er
yt hi
ng fr
om A
to Z
Self-leveling suspension, mal function 103
Sensors, care 271 Service and warranty 7 Service requirements, CBS
Condition Based Serv ice 256
Service requirements, dis play 82
Service, Roadside Assis tance 265
Settings on Control Dis play 81
Settings, storing for seat, mir rors, steering wheel 58
Shifting, automatic transmis sion 73
Short commands 277 Shoulder support 51 Side airbags 89 Side View 121 Signaling, horn 12 Signals when unlocking 37 Sitting safely 49 Size 274 Ski and snowboard bag 138 Slide/tilt glass roof 47 Smallest turning circle 275 Smoker's package 135 Snap-in adapter, mobile
phone 219 Snow chains 249 Socket 135 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag
nostics 256 Software applications,
iPhone 236 Software update 199 Spare fuse 263 Special destinations, naviga
tion 157 Specified engine oil
types 254 Speed, average 79 Speed limit, setting 80 Speedometer 14 Split screen 23 Split screen map settings 165
Spoken instructions, naviga tion 163
SPORT+ program, Dynamic Driving Control 104
SPORT program, Dynamic Driving Control 104
Sport program, transmis sion 75
Stability control systems 99 Start/Stop button 66 Start function during malfunc
tion 33 Starting aid 265 Starting the engine 66 State/province, selecting for
navigation 154 Stations, stored 180 Station, storing 174 Status display, tires 92 Status information, iDrive 22 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steering, Integral Active
Steering 102 Steering wheel, adjusting 61 Steering wheel heating 61 Steering wheel memory 58 Steptronic, automatic trans
mission 73 Stopping the engine 67 Storage compartment in the
center console 141 Storage compartments 139 Storage compartments, loca
tions 139 Storage, tires 249 Storing the vehicle 271 Street, entering for naviga
tion 155 Summer tires, tread 247 Supplementary text mes
sage 84 Surround View 117 Suspension settings 103 Switch for Dynamic Driving
Control 103 Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 132 Switch, refer to Cockpit 12
Symbols 6
T Tachometer 77 Tail and brake lamps 261 Tailgate 39 Tailgate, automatic 40 Tailgate, emergency unlock
ing 42 Tailgate, hotel function 42 Tailgate via remote control 36 Tail lamps 260 Tail lamps, bulb replace
ment 261 Tasks 227 Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7 Technical data 274 TeleService 232 Temperature, automatic cli
mate control 128 Temperature display, external
temperature 77 Temperature, engine oil 77 Tempomat, refer to Active
Cruise Control 106 Terminal, starting aid 266 Text messages 224 Text message, supplemen
tary 84 Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 44 Theft protection, lug
bolts 262 Theft protection, refer to Cen
tral locking system 35 Thermal camera, refer to Night
Vision 122 Thigh support 49 Through-loading system 136 Tilt alarm sensor 45 Tilt, seats 49 Time of arrival 80 Tire damage 247 Tire identification marks 246 Tire inflation pressure 243
Seite 293
293 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 92
Tires, changing 248 Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 243 Tires, run-flat tires 249 Tire tread 247 Toll roads, route 162 Tone 172 Tool kit 258 Tools 258 Top View 117 Total vehicle weight 275 Tow fitting 267 Towing 266 Town/city, navigation 154 Tow-starting 266 TPM Tire Pressure Moni
tor 92 Traction control 100 TRACTION program, Dynamic
Driving Control 103 Traffic bulletins, naviga
tion 165 Traffic situation/gray card 166 Transmission, automatic 73 Transporting children
safely 62 Tread, tires 247 Treble, tone 172 Trip computer 80 Triple turn signal activa
tion 71 Trip odometer 78 Trunk cover 136 Trunk lid 39 Trunk lid, automatic 40 Trunk lid, emergency unlock
ing 42 Trunk lid, hotel function 42 Trunk lid via remote con
trol 36 Turning circle 275 Turning circle lines, backup
camera 120 Turn signals, front, bulb re
placement 259 Turn signals, operation 71
Turn signals, rear, bulb re placement 261
U Unintentional alarm 45 Units of measure 82 Universal remote control 133 Unlock button, automatic
transmission 74 Unlocking/locking from in
side 38 Unlocking/locking via door
lock 38 Unlocking/locking with remote
control 36 Updates made after the edito
rial deadline 6 Updating software 199 Upholstery care 270 USB audio interface 193 USB interface 139
V Variable steering, Integral Ac
tive Steering 102 Vehicle battery 262 Vehicle battery, replacing 262 Vehicle, breaking in 146 Vehicle care 270 Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification number in the engine compart ment 251
Vehicle jack 262 Vehicle paint 270 Vehicle storage 271 Vehicle wash 269 Ventilation 130 Ventilation, refer to Parked-car
ventilation 132 Version of the navigation
data 168 Video playback 183 Video playback, iPhone 195 Video playback, snap-in
adapter 195
Voice activation, mobile phone 217
Voice activation, short com mands 277
Voice activation system 25 Volume, setting 172
W Warning lamps 14 Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 83 Warning triangle 265 Washer fluid 73 Washer fluid reservoir, ca
pacity 276 Washer nozzles, wind
shield 73 Washer system 71 Washing, vehicle 269 Water on roads 147 Weather Band 176 Weights 275 Welcome lamps 85 Wheel base, vehicle 275 Wheel change 261 Wheels, changing 248 Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 243 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 92 Width with mirrors, vehi
cle 274 Width without mirrors, vehi
cle 274 Window defroster, rear 129 Windows, powered 45 Windshield, climate con
trol 147 Windshield washer fluid 73 Windshield washer noz
zles 73 Windshield washer system 71 Windshield wiper 71 Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 73 Winter storage, care 271 Winter tires, suitable tires 249
Seite 294
294 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Ev er
yt hi
ng fr
om A
to Z
Winter tires, tread 247 Wiper blades, replacing 258 Wiper fluid 73 Wiper system 71 Wood, care 271 Word match concept, naviga
tion 24 Wrench 258
X xDrive 100 Xenon headlamps, bulb re
placement 259
Y Your individual vehicle 6
Seite 295
295 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 445 - 03 11 490
Re
fe re
nc e
M ob
ili ty
Co m
m un
ic at
io n
En te
rta in
m en
t Na
vig at
io n
Dr ivi
ng ti
ps Co
nt ro
ls At
a gl
an ce
More about BMW
bmwusa.com The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 4
0 2
60 6
44 5
Ue
*BL260644500V* Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 4
Related manuals for BMW 550iGran Turismo 5 Series 2011 Owner's Manual
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the 5 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW 550iGran Turismo 5 Series 2011 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW 5 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW 5 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the BMW 550iGran Turismo 5 Series 2011 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This BMW 550iGran Turismo 5 Series 2011 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download BMW 550iGran Turismo 5 Series 2011 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print BMW 550iGran Turismo 5 Series 2011 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW 550iGran Turismo 5 Series 2011 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.